Correct mingw target select
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
... / ...
CommitLineData
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4@syncodeindex ky cp
5@c man begin INCLUDE
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8@include bfdver.texi
9@c man end
10
11@c @smallbook
12
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
22@set ARM
23@set C6X
24@set CSKY
25@set H8300
26@set HPPA
27@set M68HC11
28@set M68K
29@set MIPS
30@set MMIX
31@set MSP430
32@set NDS32
33@set NIOSII
34@set PDP11
35@set POWERPC
36@set POWERPC64
37@set Renesas
38@set S/390
39@set SPU
40@set TICOFF
41@set WIN32
42@set XTENSA
43@end ifset
44@c man end
45
46@ifnottex
47@dircategory Software development
48@direntry
49* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
50@end direntry
51@end ifnottex
52
53@copying
54This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
55@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
56@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
57@end ifset
58version @value{VERSION}.
59
60Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
61
62Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
63under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
64or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
65with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
66Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
67section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
68@end copying
69@iftex
70@finalout
71@setchapternewpage odd
72@settitle The GNU linker
73@titlepage
74@title The GNU linker
75@sp 1
76@subtitle @code{ld}
77@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
78@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
79@end ifset
80@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
81@author Steve Chamberlain
82@author Ian Lance Taylor
83@page
84
85@tex
86{\parskip=0pt
87\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
88\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
89\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
90\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
91}
92\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
93@end tex
94
95@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
96@c man begin COPYRIGHT
97Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
98
99Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
100under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
101or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
102with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
103Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
104section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
105@c man end
106
107@end titlepage
108@end iftex
109@contents
110@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
111
112@ifnottex
113@node Top
114@top LD
115This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
116@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
117@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
118@end ifset
119version @value{VERSION}.
120
121This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
122Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
123in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
124
125@menu
126* Overview:: Overview
127* Invocation:: Invocation
128* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
129@ifset GENERIC
130* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
131@end ifset
132@ifclear GENERIC
133@ifset H8300
134* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
135@end ifset
136@ifset Renesas
137* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
138@end ifset
139@ifset ARM
140* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
141@end ifset
142@ifset M68HC11
143* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
144@end ifset
145@ifset HPPA
146* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
147@end ifset
148@ifset M68K
149* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
150@end ifset
151@ifset MIPS
152* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
153@end ifset
154@ifset POWERPC
155* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
156@end ifset
157@ifset POWERPC64
158* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
159@end ifset
160@ifset S/390
161* S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
162@end ifset
163@ifset SPU
164* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
165@end ifset
166@ifset TICOFF
167* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
168@end ifset
169@ifset WIN32
170* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
171@end ifset
172@ifset XTENSA
173* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
174@end ifset
175@end ifclear
176@ifclear SingleFormat
177* BFD:: BFD
178@end ifclear
179@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
180
181* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
182* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
183* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
184* LD Index:: LD Index
185@end menu
186@end ifnottex
187
188@node Overview
189@chapter Overview
190
191@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
192@cindex what is this?
193
194@ifset man
195@c man begin SYNOPSIS
196ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
197@c man end
198
199@c man begin SEEALSO
200ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
201the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
202@file{ld}.
203@c man end
204@end ifset
205
206@c man begin DESCRIPTION
207
208@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
209their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
210compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
211
212@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
213a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
214to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
215
216@ifset man
217@c For the man only
218This man page does not describe the command language; see the
219@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
220language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
221@end ifset
222
223@ifclear SingleFormat
224This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
225to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
226write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
227@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
228available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
229@end ifclear
230
231Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
232linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
233execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
234@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
235(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
236
237@c man end
238
239@node Invocation
240@chapter Invocation
241
242@c man begin DESCRIPTION
243
244The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
245and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
246you have many choices to control its behavior.
247
248@c man end
249
250@ifset UsesEnvVars
251@menu
252* Options:: Command-line Options
253* Environment:: Environment Variables
254@end menu
255
256@node Options
257@section Command-line Options
258@end ifset
259
260@cindex command line
261@cindex options
262
263@c man begin OPTIONS
264
265The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
266practice few of them are used in any particular context.
267@cindex standard Unix system
268For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
269object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
270link a file @code{hello.o}:
271
272@smallexample
273ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
274@end smallexample
275
276This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
277result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
278the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
279directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
280
281Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
282point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
283as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
284which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
285files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
286different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
287occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
288option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
289noted in the descriptions below.
290
291@cindex object files
292Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
293together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
294options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
295an option and its argument.
296
297Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
298specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
299and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
300are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
301message @samp{No input files}.
302
303If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
304assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
305augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
306linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
307permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
308or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
309@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
310script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
311extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
312to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
313the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
314
315For options whose names are a single letter,
316option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
317whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
318option that requires them.
319
320For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
321precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
322@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
323this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
324only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
325@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
326name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
327output.
328
329Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
330option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
331immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
332@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
333Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
334accepted.
335
336Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
337(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
338prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
339compiler driver) like this:
340
341@smallexample
342 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
343@end smallexample
344
345This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
346silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
347may also arise when passing options that require values through a
348driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
349a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
350and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
351the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
352
353@smallexample
354 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
355@end smallexample
356
357Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
358linker:
359
360@table @gcctabopt
361@include at-file.texi
362
363@kindex -a @var{keyword}
364@item -a @var{keyword}
365This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
366argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
367@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
368@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
369to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
370
371@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
373Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
374@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
375specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
376will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
377finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
378it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
379This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
380interface.
381
382@ifclear SingleFormat
383@cindex binary input format
384@kindex -b @var{format}
385@kindex --format=@var{format}
386@cindex input format
387@cindex input format
388@item -b @var{input-format}
389@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
390@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
391file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
392@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
393that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
394configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
395to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
396default input format the most usual format on each machine.
397@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
398supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
399formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
400@xref{BFD}.
401
402You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
403binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
404linking object files of different formats), by including
405@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
406particular format.
407
408The default format is taken from the environment variable
409@code{GNUTARGET}.
410@ifset UsesEnvVars
411@xref{Environment}.
412@end ifset
413You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
414@code{TARGET};
415@ifclear man
416see @ref{Format Commands}.
417@end ifclear
418@end ifclear
419
420@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
421@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
422@cindex compatibility, MRI
423@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
424@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
425For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
426files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
427@ifclear man
428@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
429@end ifclear
430@ifset man
431the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
432@end ifset
433Introduce MRI script files with
434the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
435scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
436If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
437specified by any @samp{-L} options.
438
439@cindex common allocation
440@kindex -d
441@kindex -dc
442@kindex -dp
443@item -d
444@itemx -dc
445@itemx -dp
446These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
447compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
448even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
449script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
450@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
451
452@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
453@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
454@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
455@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
456Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
457@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
458specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
459will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
460option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
461The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
462
463@kindex --enable-non-contiguous-regions
464@item --enable-non-contiguous-regions
465This option avoids generating an error if an input section does not
466fit a matching output section. The linker tries to allocate the input
467section to subseque nt matching output sections, and generates an
468error only if no output section is large enough. This is useful when
469several non-contiguous memory regions are available and the input
470section does not require a particular one. The order in which input
471sections are evaluated does not change, for instance:
472
473@smallexample
474 MEMORY @{
475 MEM1 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x14
476 MEM2 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x40
477 MEM3 (rwx) : ORIGIN : 0x2000, LENGTH = 0x40
478 @}
479 SECTIONS @{
480 mem1 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM1
481 mem2 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM2
482 mem3 : @{ *(.data.*); @} > MEM2
483 @}
484
485 with input sections:
486 .data.1: size 8
487 .data.2: size 0x10
488 .data.3: size 4
489
490 results in .data.1 affected to mem1, and .data.2 and .data.3
491 affected to mem2, even though .data.3 would fit in mem3.
492@end smallexample
493
494This option is incompatible with INSERT statements because it changes
495the way input sections are mapped to output sections.
496
497@kindex --enable-non-contiguous-regions-warnings
498@item --enable-non-contiguous-regions-warnings
499This option enables warnings when
500@code{--enable-non-contiguous-regions} allows possibly unexpected
501matches in sections mapping, potentially leading to silently
502discarding a section instead of failing because it does not fit any
503output region.
504
505@cindex entry point, from command line
506@kindex -e @var{entry}
507@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
508@item -e @var{entry}
509@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
510Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
511program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
512named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
513and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
514base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
515@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
516and other ways of specifying the entry point.
517
518@kindex --exclude-libs
519@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
520Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
521exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
522@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
523automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
524port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
525explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
526option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
527be treated as hidden.
528
529@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
530@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
531Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
532should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
533into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
534may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
535used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
536the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
537match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
538command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
539of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
540regardless of this option.
541
542@cindex dynamic symbol table
543@kindex -E
544@kindex --export-dynamic
545@kindex --no-export-dynamic
546@item -E
547@itemx --export-dynamic
548@itemx --no-export-dynamic
549When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
550option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
551all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
552set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
553
554If you do not use either of these options (or use the
555@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
556dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
557referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
558
559If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
560back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
561dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
562linking the program itself.
563
564You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
565be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
566See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
567
568Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
569support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
570the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
571
572@ifclear SingleFormat
573@cindex big-endian objects
574@cindex endianness
575@kindex -EB
576@item -EB
577Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
578
579@cindex little-endian objects
580@kindex -EL
581@item -EL
582Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
583@end ifclear
584
585@kindex -f @var{name}
586@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
587@item -f @var{name}
588@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
589When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
590to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
591table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
592symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
593
594If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
595run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
596the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
597first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
598@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
599in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
600Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
601implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
602machine-specific performance.
603
604This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
605will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
606
607@kindex -F @var{name}
608@kindex --filter=@var{name}
609@item -F @var{name}
610@itemx --filter=@var{name}
611When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
612the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
613of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
614on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
615
616If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
617run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
618dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
619filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
620found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
621used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
622@var{name}.
623
624Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
625toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
626object files.
627@ifclear SingleFormat
628The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
629@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
630@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
631environment variable.
632@end ifclear
633The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
634creating an ELF shared object.
635
636@cindex finalization function
637@kindex -fini=@var{name}
638@item -fini=@var{name}
639When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
640executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
641address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
642the function to call.
643
644@kindex -g
645@item -g
646Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
647
648@kindex -G @var{value}
649@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
650@cindex object size
651@item -G @var{value}
652@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
653Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
654@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
655MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
656sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
657
658@cindex runtime library name
659@kindex -h @var{name}
660@kindex -soname=@var{name}
661@item -h @var{name}
662@itemx -soname=@var{name}
663When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
664the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
665which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
666linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
667field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
668
669@kindex -i
670@cindex incremental link
671@item -i
672Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
673
674@cindex initialization function
675@kindex -init=@var{name}
676@item -init=@var{name}
677When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
678executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
679of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
680function to call.
681
682@cindex archive files, from cmd line
683@kindex -l @var{namespec}
684@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
685@item -l @var{namespec}
686@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
687Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
688list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
689If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
690will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
691will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
692
693On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
694files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
695and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
696called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
697@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
698indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
699to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
700@var{filename}.
701
702The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
703specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
704was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
705command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
706archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
707the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
708
709See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
710archives multiple times.
711
712You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
713
714@ifset GENERIC
715This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
716if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
717behaviour of the AIX linker.
718@end ifset
719
720@cindex search directory, from cmd line
721@kindex -L @var{dir}
722@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
723@item -L @var{searchdir}
724@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
725Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
726for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
727option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
728in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
729on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
730@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
731order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
732how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
733option is specified.
734
735If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
736prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
737@samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
738
739@ifset UsesEnvVars
740The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
741@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
742some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
743@end ifset
744
745The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
746@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
747at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
748
749@cindex emulation
750@kindex -m @var{emulation}
751@item -m @var{emulation}
752Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
753emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
754
755If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
756@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
757
758Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
759configured.
760
761@cindex link map
762@kindex -M
763@kindex --print-map
764@item -M
765@itemx --print-map
766Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
767information about the link, including the following:
768
769@itemize @bullet
770@item
771Where object files are mapped into memory.
772@item
773How common symbols are allocated.
774@item
775All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
776which caused the archive member to be brought in.
777@item
778The values assigned to symbols.
779
780Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
781involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
782have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
783linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
784of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
785the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
786linker script containing:
787
788@smallexample
789 foo = 1
790 foo = foo * 4
791 foo = foo + 8
792@end smallexample
793
794will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
795option is used:
796
797@smallexample
798 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
799 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
800 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
801@end smallexample
802
803See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
804scripts.
805
806@item
807How GNU properties are merged.
808
809When the linker merges input .note.gnu.property sections into one output
810.note.gnu.property section, some properties are removed or updated.
811These actions are reported in the link map. For example:
812
813@smallexample
814Removed property 0xc0000002 to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (not found)
815@end smallexample
816
817This indicates that property 0xc0000002 is removed from output when
818merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose property 0xc0000002 value
819is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, which doesn't have property 0xc0000002.
820
821@smallexample
822Updated property 0xc0010001 (0x1) to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (0x1)
823@end smallexample
824
825This indicates that property 0xc0010001 value is updated to 0x1 in output
826when merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value
827is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value is 0x1.
828@end itemize
829
830@cindex link map discarded
831@kindex --print-map-discarded
832@kindex --no-print-map-discarded
833@item --print-map-discarded
834@itemx --no-print-map-discarded
835Print (or do not print) the list of discarded and garbage collected sections
836in the link map. Enabled by default.
837
838@kindex -n
839@cindex read-only text
840@cindex NMAGIC
841@kindex --nmagic
842@item -n
843@itemx --nmagic
844Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
845libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
846mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
847
848@kindex -N
849@kindex --omagic
850@cindex read/write from cmd line
851@cindex OMAGIC
852@item -N
853@itemx --omagic
854Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
855not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
856libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
857mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
858is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
859specification published by Microsoft.
860
861@kindex --no-omagic
862@cindex OMAGIC
863@item --no-omagic
864This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
865sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
866be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
867shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
868
869@kindex -o @var{output}
870@kindex --output=@var{output}
871@cindex naming the output file
872@item -o @var{output}
873@itemx --output=@var{output}
874Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
875option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
876script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
877
878@kindex -O @var{level}
879@cindex generating optimized output
880@item -O @var{level}
881If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
882the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
883should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
884option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
885the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
886no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
887of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
888
889@kindex -plugin @var{name}
890@item -plugin @var{name}
891Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
892the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
893automatically added by the complier, when using link time
894optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
895wish.
896
897Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
898from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
899@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
900those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
901copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
902based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
903just copy in the newest one.
904
905@kindex --push-state
906@cindex push state governing input file handling
907@item --push-state
908The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
909flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
910restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
911
912The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
913@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
914@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
915@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
916@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
917@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
918
919One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
920used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
921listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
922something as follows:
923
924@smallexample
925-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
926@end smallexample
927
928@kindex --pop-state
929@cindex pop state governing input file handling
930@item --pop-state
931Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
932flags governing input file handling.
933
934@kindex -q
935@kindex --emit-relocs
936@cindex retain relocations in final executable
937@item -q
938@itemx --emit-relocs
939Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
940Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
941order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
942in larger executables.
943
944This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
945
946@kindex --force-dynamic
947@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
948@item --force-dynamic
949Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
950to VxWorks targets.
951
952@cindex partial link
953@cindex relocatable output
954@kindex -r
955@kindex --relocatable
956@item -r
957@itemx --relocatable
958Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
959turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
960linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
961magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
962@code{OMAGIC}.
963@c ; see @option{-N}.
964If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
965linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
966constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
967
968When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
969partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
970relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
971example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
972with input files in other formats at all.
973
974This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
975
976@kindex -R @var{file}
977@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
978@cindex symbol-only input
979@item -R @var{filename}
980@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
981Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
982relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
983to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
984programs. You may use this option more than once.
985
986For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
987followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
988the @option{-rpath} option.
989
990@kindex -s
991@kindex --strip-all
992@cindex strip all symbols
993@item -s
994@itemx --strip-all
995Omit all symbol information from the output file.
996
997@kindex -S
998@kindex --strip-debug
999@cindex strip debugger symbols
1000@item -S
1001@itemx --strip-debug
1002Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
1003
1004@kindex --strip-discarded
1005@kindex --no-strip-discarded
1006@item --strip-discarded
1007@itemx --no-strip-discarded
1008Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
1009Enabled by default.
1010
1011@kindex -t
1012@kindex --trace
1013@cindex input files, displaying
1014@item -t
1015@itemx --trace
1016Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them. If
1017@samp{-t} is given twice then members within archives are also printed.
1018@samp{-t} output is useful to generate a list of all the object files
1019and scripts involved in linking, for example, when packaging files for
1020a linker bug report.
1021
1022@kindex -T @var{script}
1023@kindex --script=@var{script}
1024@cindex script files
1025@item -T @var{scriptfile}
1026@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
1027Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
1028@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
1029@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
1030output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
1031the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
1032specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
1033options accumulate.
1034
1035@kindex -dT @var{script}
1036@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
1037@cindex script files
1038@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
1039@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
1040Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
1041
1042This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
1043processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
1044command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
1045@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
1046behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
1047command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
1048the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
1049@samp{gcc}).
1050
1051@kindex -u @var{symbol}
1052@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
1053@cindex undefined symbol
1054@item -u @var{symbol}
1055@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
1056Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
1057symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1058modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1059different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1060option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1061
1062If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1063into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1064undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1065instead.
1066
1067@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1068@cindex symbols, require defined
1069@cindex defined symbol
1070@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1071Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1072is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1073is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1074and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1075@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1076can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1077
1078@kindex -Ur
1079@cindex constructors
1080@item -Ur
1081For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1082@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
1083turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
1084@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1085It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1086with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1087be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1088@samp{-r} for the others.
1089
1090@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1091@cindex orphan sections
1092@cindex sections, orphan
1093@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1094Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1095specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1096
1097@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1098
1099@table @code
1100@item place
1101Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1102the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1103@samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
1104
1105@item discard
1106All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1107@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1108
1109@item warn
1110The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1111issue a warning.
1112
1113@item error
1114The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1115@end table
1116
1117The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1118
1119@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1120@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1121Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1122@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1123missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1124specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1125multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1126input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1127in a linker script.
1128
1129@kindex -v
1130@kindex -V
1131@kindex --version
1132@cindex version
1133@item -v
1134@itemx --version
1135@itemx -V
1136Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1137lists the supported emulations.
1138
1139@kindex -x
1140@kindex --discard-all
1141@cindex deleting local symbols
1142@item -x
1143@itemx --discard-all
1144Delete all local symbols.
1145
1146@kindex -X
1147@kindex --discard-locals
1148@cindex local symbols, deleting
1149@item -X
1150@itemx --discard-locals
1151Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1152system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1153or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1154
1155@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1156@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1157@cindex symbol tracing
1158@item -y @var{symbol}
1159@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1160Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1161option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1162to prepend an underscore.
1163
1164This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1165don't know where the reference is coming from.
1166
1167@kindex -Y @var{path}
1168@item -Y @var{path}
1169Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1170for Solaris compatibility.
1171
1172@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1173@item -z @var{keyword}
1174The recognized keywords are:
1175@table @samp
1176
1177@item bndplt
1178Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1179
1180@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1181@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1182@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1183@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1184Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1185to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1186@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1187@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1188@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1189@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1190Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1191
1192@item cet-report=none
1193@itemx cet-report=warning
1194@itemx cet-report=error
1195Specify how to report the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT and
1196GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK properties in input .note.gnu.property
1197section. @option{cet-report=none}, which is the default, will make the
1198linker not report missing properties in input files.
1199@option{cet-report=warning} will make the linker issue a warning for
1200missing properties in input files. @option{cet-report=error} will make
1201the linker issue an error for missing properties in input files.
1202Note that @option{ibt} will turn off the missing
1203GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT property report and @option{shstk} will
1204turn off the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK property report.
1205Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1206
1207@item combreloc
1208@itemx nocombreloc
1209Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1210dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
1211
1212@item common
1213@itemx nocommon
1214Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1215link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1216
1217@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1218Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1219layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1220using pages of this size.
1221
1222@item defs
1223Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1224is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1225This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
1226
1227@item dynamic-undefined-weak
1228@itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1229Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1230if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1231by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1232@samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1233may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1234selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1235these options.
1236
1237@item execstack
1238Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1239
1240@item global
1241This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1242the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1243of subsequently loaded libraries.
1244
1245@item globalaudit
1246This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1247This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1248setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1249tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
1250the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
1251all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
1252
1253@item ibtplt
1254Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1255Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1256
1257@item ibt
1258Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1259to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1260Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1261
1262@item initfirst
1263This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1264It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1265before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1266the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1267the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1268objects.
1269
1270@item interpose
1271Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1272so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1273libraries not so marked.
1274
1275@item lazy
1276When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1277dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1278the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1279Lazy binding is the default.
1280
1281@item loadfltr
1282Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
1283
1284@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1285Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
1286
1287@item muldefs
1288Allow multiple definitions.
1289
1290@item nocopyreloc
1291Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1292defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1293
1294@item nodefaultlib
1295Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1296should ignore any default library search paths.
1297
1298@item nodelete
1299Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1300
1301@item nodlopen
1302Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
1303
1304@item nodump
1305Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1306
1307@item noexecstack
1308Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1309
1310@item noextern-protected-data
1311Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1312library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1313used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1314generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1315module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1316i386 and x86-64.
1317
1318@item noreloc-overflow
1319Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1320relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1321overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1322
1323@item now
1324When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1325dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1326when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1327function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1328called.
1329
1330@item origin
1331Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
1332
1333@item relro
1334@itemx norelro
1335Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1336specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1337relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1338than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
1339Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
1340
1341@item separate-code
1342@itemx noseparate-code
1343Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1344specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1345be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1346code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1347
1348@item shstk
1349Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1350to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1351Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1352
1353@item stack-size=@var{value}
1354Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1355Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1356@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1357
1358@item text
1359@itemx notext
1360@itemx textoff
1361Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1362relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1363@samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
1364
1365@item undefs
1366Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1367either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1368This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1369
1370@end table
1371
1372Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1373
1374@kindex -(
1375@cindex groups of archives
1376@item -( @var{archives} -)
1377@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1378The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1379either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1380
1381The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1382references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1383the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1384archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1385object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1386would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1387they will all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1388resolved.
1389
1390Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1391it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1392more archives.
1393
1394@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1395@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1396@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1397@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1398Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1399recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1400and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1401the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1402behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1403so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1404restore the old behaviour.
1405
1406@kindex --as-needed
1407@kindex --no-as-needed
1408@item --as-needed
1409@itemx --no-as-needed
1410This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1411on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1412the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1413on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1414needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1415emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1416non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1417the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1418non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1419Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1420the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1421needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1422from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1423
1424@kindex --add-needed
1425@kindex --no-add-needed
1426@item --add-needed
1427@itemx --no-add-needed
1428These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1429their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1430options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1431and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1432
1433@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1434@item -assert @var{keyword}
1435This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1436
1437@kindex -Bdynamic
1438@kindex -dy
1439@kindex -call_shared
1440@item -Bdynamic
1441@itemx -dy
1442@itemx -call_shared
1443Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1444for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1445default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1446for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1447multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1448@option{-l} options which follow it.
1449
1450@kindex -Bgroup
1451@item -Bgroup
1452Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1453section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1454object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1455@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1456only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1457
1458@kindex -Bstatic
1459@kindex -dn
1460@kindex -non_shared
1461@kindex -static
1462@item -Bstatic
1463@itemx -dn
1464@itemx -non_shared
1465@itemx -static
1466Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1467platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1468variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1469may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1470library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1471option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1472option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1473shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1474references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1475libraries.
1476
1477@kindex -Bsymbolic
1478@item -Bsymbolic
1479When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1480definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1481for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1482within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1483platforms which support shared libraries.
1484
1485@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1486@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1487When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1488symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1489This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1490libraries.
1491
1492@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1493@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1494Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1495typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1496global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1497within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1498to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1499in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1500which support shared libraries.
1501
1502The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1503scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1504
1505@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1506@item --dynamic-list-data
1507Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1508
1509@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1510@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1511Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1512is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1513
1514@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1515@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1516Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1517
1518@kindex --check-sections
1519@kindex --no-check-sections
1520@item --check-sections
1521@itemx --no-check-sections
1522Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1523been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1524perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1525suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1526allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1527restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1528Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1529force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1530option.
1531
1532@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1533@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1534@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1535@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1536This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1537by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1538command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1539output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1540input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1541specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1542follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1543behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1544
1545This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1546libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1547mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1548their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1549required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1550the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1551dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1552symbols.
1553
1554@cindex cross reference table
1555@kindex --cref
1556@item --cref
1557Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1558generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1559Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1560
1561The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1562easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1563sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1564symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1565definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1566where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1567symbol are listed.
1568
1569@cindex common allocation
1570@kindex --no-define-common
1571@item --no-define-common
1572This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1573The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1574@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1575
1576The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1577the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1578of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1579forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1580Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1581from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1582This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1583and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1584duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1585paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1586
1587@cindex group allocation in linker script
1588@cindex section groups
1589@cindex COMDAT
1590@kindex --force-group-allocation
1591@item --force-group-allocation
1592This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1593normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1594default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1595change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1596command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1597effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1598
1599@cindex symbols, from command line
1600@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1601@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1602Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1603address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1604times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1605limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1606context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1607symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1608constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1609using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1610@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1611equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1612
1613@cindex demangling, from command line
1614@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1615@kindex --no-demangle
1616@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1617@itemx --no-demangle
1618These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1619and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1620present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1621underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1622mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1623different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1624to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1625demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1626is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1627
1628@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1629@kindex -I@var{file}
1630@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1631@item -I@var{file}
1632@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1633Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1634generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1635linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1636doing.
1637
1638@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1639@item --no-dynamic-linker
1640When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1641linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1642executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1643entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1644
1645@kindex --embedded-relocs
1646@item --embedded-relocs
1647This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1648that the relocs are stored in a target-specific section. This option
1649is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1650targets.
1651
1652@kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1653@item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1654Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1655in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1656
1657@kindex --fatal-warnings
1658@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1659@item --fatal-warnings
1660@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1661Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1662with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1663
1664@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1665@item --force-exe-suffix
1666Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1667
1668If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1669@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1670the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1671option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1672Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1673it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1674
1675@kindex --gc-sections
1676@kindex --no-gc-sections
1677@cindex garbage collection
1678@item --gc-sections
1679@itemx --no-gc-sections
1680Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1681targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1682performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1683@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1684collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1685implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1686
1687@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1688examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1689symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1690command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1691referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1692libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1693referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1694the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1695relocations. See @samp{--entry}, @samp{--undefined}, and
1696@samp{--gc-keep-exported}.
1697
1698This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1699@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1700specified either by one of the options @samp{--entry},
1701@samp{--undefined}, or @samp{--gc-keep-exported} or by a @code{ENTRY}
1702command in the linker script.
1703
1704@kindex --print-gc-sections
1705@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1706@cindex garbage collection
1707@item --print-gc-sections
1708@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1709List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1710printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1711collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1712default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1713be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1714line.
1715
1716@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1717@cindex garbage collection
1718@item --gc-keep-exported
1719When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1720collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1721default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1722executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1723collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1724Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1725it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1726ELF format targets.
1727
1728@kindex --print-output-format
1729@cindex output format
1730@item --print-output-format
1731Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1732other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1733in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1734
1735@kindex --print-memory-usage
1736@cindex memory usage
1737@item --print-memory-usage
1738Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1739the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1740quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1741headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1742parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1743
1744@smallexample
1745Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1746 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1747 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1748@end smallexample
1749
1750@cindex help
1751@cindex usage
1752@kindex --help
1753@item --help
1754Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1755
1756@kindex --target-help
1757@item --target-help
1758Print a summary of all target-specific options on the standard output and exit.
1759
1760@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1761@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1762Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1763@option{-M} option, above.
1764
1765@cindex memory usage
1766@kindex --no-keep-memory
1767@item --no-keep-memory
1768@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1769symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1770instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1771necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1772while linking a large executable.
1773
1774@kindex --no-undefined
1775@kindex -z defs
1776@kindex -z undefs
1777@item --no-undefined
1778@itemx -z defs
1779Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1780is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1781The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1782behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1783libraries being linked in.
1784
1785The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1786
1787@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1788@kindex -z muldefs
1789@item --allow-multiple-definition
1790@itemx -z muldefs
1791Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1792report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1793first definition will be used.
1794
1795@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1796@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1797@item --allow-shlib-undefined
1798@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1799Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1800This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1801determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1802shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1803how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1804
1805The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1806referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1807an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1808a shared library.
1809
1810The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1811libraries specified at link time are that:
1812
1813@itemize @bullet
1814@item
1815A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1816that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1817resolvable at load time.
1818@item
1819There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1820symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1821
1822The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1823select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1824architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1825appropriate memset function.
1826@end itemize
1827
1828@kindex --no-undefined-version
1829@item --no-undefined-version
1830Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1831it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1832will be issued instead.
1833
1834@kindex --default-symver
1835@item --default-symver
1836Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1837exported symbols.
1838
1839@kindex --default-imported-symver
1840@item --default-imported-symver
1841Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1842imported symbols.
1843
1844@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1845@item --no-warn-mismatch
1846Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1847files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1848been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1849This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1850errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1851have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1852inappropriate.
1853
1854@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1855@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1856Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1857library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1858
1859@kindex --no-whole-archive
1860@item --no-whole-archive
1861Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1862archive files.
1863
1864@cindex output file after errors
1865@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1866@item --noinhibit-exec
1867Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1868Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1869errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1870when it issues any error whatsoever.
1871
1872@kindex -nostdlib
1873@item -nostdlib
1874Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1875command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1876(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1877
1878@ifclear SingleFormat
1879@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1880@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1881@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1882file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1883@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1884object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1885object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1886should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1887usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1888name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1889list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1890command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1891this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1892@end ifclear
1893
1894@kindex --out-implib
1895@item --out-implib @var{file}
1896Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1897the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1898library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1899may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1900behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1901step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1902the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1903
1904@kindex -pie
1905@kindex --pic-executable
1906@item -pie
1907@itemx --pic-executable
1908@cindex position independent executables
1909Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1910ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1911libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1912address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1913normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1914defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1915
1916@kindex -qmagic
1917@item -qmagic
1918This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1919
1920@kindex -Qy
1921@item -Qy
1922This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1923
1924@kindex --relax
1925@cindex synthesizing linker
1926@cindex relaxing addressing modes
1927@cindex --no-relax
1928@item --relax
1929@itemx --no-relax
1930An option with machine dependent effects.
1931@ifset GENERIC
1932This option is only supported on a few targets.
1933@end ifset
1934@ifset H8300
1935@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1936@end ifset
1937@ifset XTENSA
1938@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1939@end ifset
1940@ifset M68HC11
1941@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1942@end ifset
1943@ifset NIOSII
1944@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1945@end ifset
1946@ifset POWERPC
1947@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1948@end ifset
1949
1950On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target-specific,
1951global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1952addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1953synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1954instructions, and combining constant values.
1955
1956On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1957debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1958@ifset GENERIC
1959This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1960family of processors.
1961@end ifset
1962
1963@ifset GENERIC
1964On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1965but ignored.
1966@end ifset
1967
1968On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1969@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1970
1971@cindex retaining specified symbols
1972@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1973@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1974@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1975@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1976Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1977discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1978symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1979@ifset GENERIC
1980(such as VxWorks)
1981@end ifset
1982where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1983run-time memory.
1984
1985@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1986or symbols needed for relocations.
1987
1988You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1989line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1990
1991@ifset GENERIC
1992@item -rpath=@var{dir}
1993@cindex runtime library search path
1994@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1995Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1996linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1997arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1998them to locate shared objects at runtime.
1999
2000The @option{-rpath} option is also used when locating shared objects which
2001are needed by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the
2002description of the @option{-rpath-link} option. Searching @option{-rpath}
2003in this way is only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which
2004have been configured with the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
2005
2006If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an ELF executable, the
2007contents of the environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it
2008is defined.
2009
2010The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
2011SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
2012@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
2013runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
2014options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
2015gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
2016file systems.
2017
2018For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
2019followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
2020the @option{-rpath} option.
2021@end ifset
2022
2023@ifset GENERIC
2024@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2025@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
2026@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
2027When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
2028happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
2029of the input files.
2030
2031When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
2032non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
2033shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
2034explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
2035specifies the first set of directories to search. The
2036@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
2037either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
2038appearing multiple times.
2039
2040The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
2041directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
2042containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
2043and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
204464-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
2045
2046The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
2047@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
2048supported.
2049
2050This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
2051that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
2052is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
2053runtime linker would do.
2054
2055The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
2056libraries:
2057
2058@enumerate
2059@item
2060Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
2061@item
2062Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
2063between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
2064specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
2065used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
2066at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
2067by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
2068the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
2069@item
2070On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
2071@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
2072environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
2073@item
2074On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
2075directories specified using @option{-L} options.
2076@item
2077For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
2078variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
2079@item
2080For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
2081@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
2082libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
2083@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2084@item
2085The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2086@item
2087For a linker for a Linux system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2088exists, the list of directories found in that file. Note: the path
2089to this file is prefixed with the @code{sysroot} value, if that is
2090defined, and then any @code{prefix} string if the linker was
2091configured with the @command{--prefix=<path>} option.
2092@item
2093For a native linker on a FreeBSD system, any directories specified by
2094the @code{_PATH_ELF_HINTS} macro defined in the @file{elf-hints.h}
2095header file.
2096@item
2097Any directories specifed by a @code{SEARCH_DIR} command in the
2098linker script being used.
2099@end enumerate
2100
2101If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2102warning and continue with the link.
2103@end ifset
2104
2105@kindex -shared
2106@kindex -Bshareable
2107@item -shared
2108@itemx -Bshareable
2109@cindex shared libraries
2110Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2111and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
2112shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
2113undefined symbols in the link.
2114
2115@kindex --sort-common
2116@item --sort-common
2117@itemx --sort-common=ascending
2118@itemx --sort-common=descending
2119This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2120ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2121sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2122eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2123between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2124specified, then descending order is assumed.
2125
2126@kindex --sort-section=name
2127@item --sort-section=name
2128This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2129patterns in the linker script.
2130
2131@kindex --sort-section=alignment
2132@item --sort-section=alignment
2133This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2134patterns in the linker script.
2135
2136@kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2137@item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2138This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2139.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2140post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2141
2142@kindex --split-by-file
2143@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
2144Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
2145each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2146size of 1 if not given.
2147
2148@kindex --split-by-reloc
2149@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
2150Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
2151output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
2152This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
2153certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2154cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2155that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2156support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2157input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2158more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
2159many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
2160
2161@kindex --stats
2162@item --stats
2163Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2164as execution time and memory usage.
2165
2166@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
2167@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2168Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2169configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2170that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2171
2172@kindex --task-link
2173@item --task-link
2174This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2175file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2176
2177@kindex --traditional-format
2178@cindex traditional format
2179@item --traditional-format
2180For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2181the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
2182use the traditional format instead.
2183
2184@cindex dbx
2185For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
2186symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2187full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2188@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
2189trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
2190combine duplicate entries.
2191
2192@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2193@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2194Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2195address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2196times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2197line.
2198@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2199for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2200@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2201should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2202sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2203
2204@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2205@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2206@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
2207@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2208@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2209@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2210@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2211Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
2212@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
2213
2214@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2215@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2216@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2217When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2218byte of the text segment.
2219
2220@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2221@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2222@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2223When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2224the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2225text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2226
2227@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2228@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2229@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2230When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2231model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2232
2233@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2234@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2235Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2236values for @samp{method}:
2237
2238@table @samp
2239@item ignore-all
2240Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2241
2242@item report-all
2243Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2244
2245@item ignore-in-object-files
2246Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2247ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2248
2249@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2250Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2251ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2252when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2253libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2254command line.
2255@end table
2256
2257The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2258by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2259
2260Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2261unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2262can change this to a warning.
2263
2264@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2265@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2266@item --dll-verbose
2267@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2268Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2269supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2270the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2271argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2272
2273@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2274@cindex version script, symbol versions
2275@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2276Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2277used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2278about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2279is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2280see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2281use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2282symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2283@xref{WIN32}.
2284
2285@kindex --warn-common
2286@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2287@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2288@item --warn-common
2289Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2290a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2291but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2292you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2293Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2294warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2295
2296There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2297
2298@table @samp
2299@item int i = 1;
2300A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2301file.
2302
2303@item extern int i;
2304An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2305There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2306variable somewhere.
2307
2308@item int i;
2309A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2310variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2311The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2312single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2313size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2314a definition of the same variable.
2315@end table
2316
2317The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2318Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2319just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2320encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2321a common symbol.
2322
2323@enumerate
2324@item
2325Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2326definition for the symbol.
2327@smallexample
2328@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2329 overridden by definition
2330@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2331@end smallexample
2332
2333@item
2334Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2335the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2336except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2337@smallexample
2338@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2339 overriding common
2340@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2341@end smallexample
2342
2343@item
2344Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2345@smallexample
2346@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2347 of `@var{symbol}'
2348@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2349@end smallexample
2350
2351@item
2352Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2353@smallexample
2354@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2355 overridden by larger common
2356@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2357@end smallexample
2358
2359@item
2360Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2361the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2362encountered in a different order.
2363@smallexample
2364@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2365 overriding smaller common
2366@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2367@end smallexample
2368@end enumerate
2369
2370@kindex --warn-constructors
2371@item --warn-constructors
2372Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2373object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2374detect the use of global constructors.
2375
2376@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2377@item --warn-multiple-gp
2378Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2379This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2380Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2381section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2382of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2383base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2384base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2385bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2386large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2387values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2388option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2389
2390@kindex --warn-once
2391@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2392@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2393@item --warn-once
2394Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2395which refers to it.
2396
2397@kindex --warn-section-align
2398@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2399@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2400@item --warn-section-align
2401Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2402alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2403The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2404is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2405the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2406
2407@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2408@item --warn-shared-textrel
2409Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2410
2411@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2412@item --warn-alternate-em
2413Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2414
2415@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2416@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2417If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2418@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2419This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2420
2421@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2422@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2423This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2424it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2425
2426@kindex --whole-archive
2427@cindex including an entire archive
2428@item --whole-archive
2429For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2430@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2431in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2432files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2433library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2434library. This option may be used more than once.
2435
2436Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2437about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2438Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2439list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2440your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2441
2442@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2443@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2444Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2445@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2446undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2447@var{symbol}.
2448
2449This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2450wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2451wishes to call the system function, it should call
2452@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2453
2454Here is a trivial example:
2455
2456@smallexample
2457void *
2458__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2459@{
2460 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2461 return __real_malloc (c);
2462@}
2463@end smallexample
2464
2465If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2466all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2467instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2468call the real @code{malloc} function.
2469
2470You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2471links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2472you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2473file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2474call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2475
2476Only undefined references are replaced by the linker. So, translation unit
2477internal references to @var{symbol} are not resolved to
2478@code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. In the next example, the call to @code{f} in
2479@code{g} is not resolved to @code{__wrap_f}.
2480
2481@smallexample
2482int
2483f (void)
2484@{
2485 return 123;
2486@}
2487
2488int
2489g (void)
2490@{
2491 return f();
2492@}
2493@end smallexample
2494
2495@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2496@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
2497@item --eh-frame-hdr
2498@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2499Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2500(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2501section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2502
2503@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2504@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2505Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2506generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2507if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2508
2509@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2510@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2511@item --enable-new-dtags
2512@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2513This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2514systems may not understand them. If you specify
2515@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2516and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2517If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2518created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2519those options are only available for ELF systems.
2520
2521@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2522@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2523Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2524close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2525time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2526increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2527value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2528
2529@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2530@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2531Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2532@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2533new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2534the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2535hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
2536but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
2537
2538@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2539@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2540@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2541@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2542@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2543@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2544@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2545@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2546On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2547compressed using zlib.
2548
2549@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2550sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2551DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2552instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2553also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2554sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2555
2556The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2557@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2558
2559Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2560sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2561for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2562uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2563
2564The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2565involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2566default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2567@option{--help} option.
2568
2569@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2570@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2571This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2572linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2573for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2574about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2575
2576Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
25771021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2578run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2579has been used.
2580
2581The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2582enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2583
2584@kindex --build-id
2585@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2586@item --build-id
2587@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2588Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2589or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2590unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2591@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2592@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2593@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2594the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2595string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2596@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2597is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2598
2599The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2600that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2601unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2602to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2603file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2604string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2605
2606Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2607@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2608@end table
2609
2610@c man end
2611
2612@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2613
2614@c man begin OPTIONS
2615
2616The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2617the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2618normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2619use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2620@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2621like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2622symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2623object file).
2624
2625In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2626support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
2627PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2628values by either a space or an equals sign.
2629
2630@table @gcctabopt
2631
2632@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2633@item --add-stdcall-alias
2634If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2635as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2636[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2637
2638@kindex --base-file
2639@item --base-file @var{file}
2640Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2641addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2642@file{dlltool}.
2643[This is an i386 PE specific option]
2644
2645@kindex --dll
2646@item --dll
2647Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2648@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2649file.
2650[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2651
2652@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2653@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2654@item --enable-long-section-names
2655@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2656The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2657the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2658for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2659fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2660to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2661allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2662disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2663generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2664as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2665with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2666GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2667information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2668option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2669section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2670when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2671image and not stripping symbols.
2672[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2673
2674@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2675@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2676@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2677@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2678If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2679do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2680only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2681resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2682undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2683@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2684to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2685warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2686import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2687to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2688feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2689@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2690mismatches are considered to be errors.
2691[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2692
2693@kindex --leading-underscore
2694@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2695@item --leading-underscore
2696@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2697For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2698in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2699disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2700
2701@cindex DLLs, creating
2702@kindex --export-all-symbols
2703@item --export-all-symbols
2704If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2705be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2706otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2707explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2708attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2709option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2710@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2711@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2712exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2713re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2714such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2715@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2716@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2717Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2718not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2719extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2720(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2721These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2722@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2723@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2724@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2725@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2726[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2727
2728@kindex --exclude-symbols
2729@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2730Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2731exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2732[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2733
2734@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2735@item --exclude-all-symbols
2736Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2737[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2738
2739@kindex --file-alignment
2740@item --file-alignment
2741Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2742file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2743512.
2744[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2745
2746@cindex heap size
2747@kindex --heap
2748@item --heap @var{reserve}
2749@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2750Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2751to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2752committed.
2753[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2754
2755@cindex image base
2756@kindex --image-base
2757@item --image-base @var{value}
2758Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2759the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2760is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2761your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2762other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2763for dlls.
2764[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2765
2766@kindex --kill-at
2767@item --kill-at
2768If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2769symbols before they are exported.
2770[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2771
2772@kindex --large-address-aware
2773@item --large-address-aware
2774If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2775header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2776greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2777or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2778section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2779[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2780
2781@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2782@item --disable-large-address-aware
2783Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2784This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2785driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2786addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2787[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2788
2789@kindex --major-image-version
2790@item --major-image-version @var{value}
2791Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2792[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2793
2794@kindex --major-os-version
2795@item --major-os-version @var{value}
2796Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2797[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2798
2799@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2800@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2801Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2802[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2803
2804@kindex --minor-image-version
2805@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2806Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2807[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2808
2809@kindex --minor-os-version
2810@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2811Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2812[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2813
2814@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2815@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2816Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2817[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2818
2819@cindex DEF files, creating
2820@cindex DLLs, creating
2821@kindex --output-def
2822@item --output-def @var{file}
2823The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2824file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2825(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2826library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2827automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2828[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2829
2830@cindex DLLs, creating
2831@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2832@item --enable-auto-image-base
2833@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2834Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2835@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2836By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2837for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2838execution are avoided.
2839[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2840
2841@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2842@item --disable-auto-image-base
2843Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2844user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2845default.
2846[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2847
2848@cindex DLLs, linking to
2849@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2850@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2851When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2852search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2853@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2854between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2855uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2856@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2857[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2858
2859@kindex --enable-auto-import
2860@item --enable-auto-import
2861Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2862DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2863mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2864[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2865
2866The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2867feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2868
2869Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2870of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2871PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
2872
2873Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2874data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2875placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2876around a problem with consts that is described here:
2877http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2878
2879Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2880see this message:
2881
2882"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2883documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2884
2885This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2886ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2887allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2888fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2889constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2890multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2891this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2892of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2893the warning, and exit.
2894
2895There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2896data type of the exported variable:
2897
2898One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2899of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2900this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2901
2902A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2903that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2904there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2905a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2906
2907@example
2908extern type extern_array[];
2909extern_array[1] -->
2910 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2911@end example
2912
2913or
2914
2915@example
2916extern type extern_array[];
2917extern_array[1] -->
2918 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2919@end example
2920
2921For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2922is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2923
2924@example
2925extern struct s extern_struct;
2926extern_struct.field -->
2927 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2928@end example
2929
2930or
2931
2932@example
2933extern long long extern_ll;
2934extern_ll -->
2935 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2936@end example
2937
2938A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2939'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2940@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2941requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2942building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2943merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2944between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2945constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2946
2947Original:
2948@example
2949--foo.h
2950extern int arr[];
2951--foo.c
2952#include "foo.h"
2953void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2954 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2955@}
2956@end example
2957
2958Solution 1:
2959@example
2960--foo.h
2961extern int arr[];
2962--foo.c
2963#include "foo.h"
2964void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2965 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2966 volatile int *parr = arr;
2967 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2968@}
2969@end example
2970
2971Solution 2:
2972@example
2973--foo.h
2974/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2975#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2976 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2977#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2978#else
2979#define FOO_IMPORT
2980#endif
2981extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2982--foo.c
2983#include "foo.h"
2984void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2985 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2986@}
2987@end example
2988
2989A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2990library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2991for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2992functions).
2993
2994@kindex --disable-auto-import
2995@item --disable-auto-import
2996Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2997@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2998[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2999
3000@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3001@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3002If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
3003that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
3004a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
3005environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
3006[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3007
3008@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3009@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
3010Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
3011[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3012
3013@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
3014@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
3015Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
3016[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3017
3018@kindex --section-alignment
3019@item --section-alignment
3020Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
3021addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
3022[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3023
3024@cindex stack size
3025@kindex --stack
3026@item --stack @var{reserve}
3027@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
3028Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
3029to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
3030committed.
3031[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3032
3033@kindex --subsystem
3034@item --subsystem @var{which}
3035@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
3036@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
3037Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
3038legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
3039@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
3040the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
3041@var{which}.
3042[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
3043
3044The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
3045of the PE file header:
3046[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
3047
3048@kindex --high-entropy-va
3049@item --high-entropy-va
3050Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
3051(ASLR).
3052This option also implies @option{--dynamicbase} and
3053@option{--enable-reloc-section}.
3054
3055@kindex --dynamicbase
3056@item --dynamicbase
3057The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
3058randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
3059Vista for i386 PE targets.
3060This option also implies @option{--enable-reloc-section}.
3061
3062@kindex --forceinteg
3063@item --forceinteg
3064Code integrity checks are enforced.
3065
3066@kindex --nxcompat
3067@item --nxcompat
3068The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
3069This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
3070
3071@kindex --no-isolation
3072@item --no-isolation
3073Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
3074
3075@kindex --no-seh
3076@item --no-seh
3077The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
3078this image.
3079
3080@kindex --no-bind
3081@item --no-bind
3082Do not bind this image.
3083
3084@kindex --wdmdriver
3085@item --wdmdriver
3086The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
3087
3088@kindex --tsaware
3089@item --tsaware
3090The image is Terminal Server aware.
3091
3092@kindex --insert-timestamp
3093@item --insert-timestamp
3094@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
3095Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
3096as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
3097other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
3098will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
3099same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
3100can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
3101that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
3102identically.
3103
3104@kindex --enable-reloc-section
3105@item --enable-reloc-section
3106Create the base relocation table, which is necessary if the image
3107is loaded at a different image base than specified in the PE header.
3108@end table
3109
3110@c man end
3111
3112@ifset C6X
3113@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
3114
3115@c man begin OPTIONS
3116
3117The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
3118libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
3119all executables use an index of 0.
3120
3121@table @gcctabopt
3122
3123@kindex --dsbt-size
3124@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
3125This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
3126or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3127entries.
3128
3129@kindex --dsbt-index
3130@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3131This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3132to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3133executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3134@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3135
3136@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3137The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3138exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3139
3140@end table
3141
3142@c man end
3143@end ifset
3144
3145@ifset CSKY
3146@subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3147
3148@c man begin OPTIONS
3149
3150@table @gcctabopt
3151
3152@kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3153@item --branch-stub
3154This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3155sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3156usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3157can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3158the compiler or assembler.
3159
3160@kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3161@item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3162This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3163It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3164be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3165stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3166sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3167@samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3168linker should choose suitable defaults.
3169
3170@end table
3171
3172@c man end
3173@end ifset
3174
3175@ifset M68HC11
3176@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3177
3178@c man begin OPTIONS
3179
3180The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3181memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3182
3183@table @gcctabopt
3184
3185@kindex --no-trampoline
3186@item --no-trampoline
3187This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3188is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3189instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3190
3191@kindex --bank-window
3192@item --bank-window @var{name}
3193This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3194the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3195The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3196paging and addresses within the memory window.
3197
3198@end table
3199
3200@c man end
3201@end ifset
3202
3203@ifset M68K
3204@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3205
3206@c man begin OPTIONS
3207
3208The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3209when linking for 68K targets.
3210
3211@table @gcctabopt
3212
3213@kindex --got
3214@item --got=@var{type}
3215This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3216@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3217@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3218Info entry for @file{ld}.
3219
3220@end table
3221
3222@c man end
3223@end ifset
3224
3225@ifset MIPS
3226@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3227
3228@c man begin OPTIONS
3229
3230The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
3231generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3232linking for MIPS targets.
3233
3234@table @gcctabopt
3235
3236@kindex --insn32
3237@item --insn32
3238@kindex --no-insn32
3239@itemx --no-insn32
3240These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3241generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3242or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
324332-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3244used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3245possible.
3246
3247@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3248@item --ignore-branch-isa
3249@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3250@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3251These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3252transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3253accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3254is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3255instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3256equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3257calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3258a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3259an error.
3260
3261@kindex --compact-branches
3262@item --compact-branches
3263@kindex --no-compact-branches
3264@itemx --no-compact-branches
3265These options control the generation of compact instructions by the linker
3266in the PLT entries for MIPS R6.
3267
3268@end table
3269
3270@c man end
3271@end ifset
3272
3273
3274@ifset PDP11
3275@subsection Options specific to PDP11 targets
3276
3277@c man begin OPTIONS
3278
3279For the pdp11-aout target, three variants of the output format can be
3280produced as selected by the following options. The default variant
3281for pdp11-aout is the @samp{--omagic} option, whereas for other
3282targets @samp{--nmagic} is the default. The @samp{--imagic} option is
3283defined only for the pdp11-aout target, while the others are described
3284here as they apply to the pdp11-aout target.
3285
3286@table @gcctabopt
3287
3288@kindex -N
3289@item -N
3290@kindex --omagic
3291@itemx --omagic
3292
3293Mark the output as @code{OMAGIC} (0407) in the @file{a.out} header to
3294indicate that the text segment is not to be write-protected and
3295shared. Since the text and data sections are both readable and
3296writable, the data section is allocated immediately contiguous after
3297the text segment. This is the oldest format for PDP11 executable
3298programs and is the default for @command{ld} on PDP11 Unix systems
3299from the beginning through 2.11BSD.
3300
3301@kindex -n
3302@item -n
3303@kindex --nmagic
3304@itemx --nmagic
3305
3306Mark the output as @code{NMAGIC} (0410) in the @file{a.out} header to
3307indicate that when the output file is executed, the text portion will
3308be read-only and shareable among all processes executing the same
3309file. This involves moving the data areas up to the first possible 8K
3310byte page boundary following the end of the text. This option creates
3311a @emph{pure executable} format.
3312
3313@kindex -z
3314@item -z
3315@kindex --imagic
3316@itemx --imagic
3317
3318Mark the output as @code{IMAGIC} (0411) in the @file{a.out} header to
3319indicate that when the output file is executed, the program text and
3320data areas will be loaded into separate address spaces using the split
3321instruction and data space feature of the memory management unit in
3322larger models of the PDP11. This doubles the address space available
3323to the program. The text segment is again pure, write-protected, and
3324shareable. The only difference in the output format between this
3325option and the others, besides the magic number, is that both the text
3326and data sections start at location 0. The @samp{-z} option selected
3327this format in 2.11BSD. This option creates a @emph{separate
3328executable} format.
3329
3330@kindex --no-omagic
3331@item --no-omagic
3332
3333Equivalent to @samp{--nmagic} for pdp11-aout.
3334
3335@end table
3336
3337@c man end
3338@end ifset
3339
3340@ifset UsesEnvVars
3341@node Environment
3342@section Environment Variables
3343
3344@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3345
3346You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
3347@ifclear SingleFormat
3348@code{GNUTARGET},
3349@end ifclear
3350@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
3351
3352@ifclear SingleFormat
3353@kindex GNUTARGET
3354@cindex default input format
3355@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3356use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3357of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
3358@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
3359of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3360attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3361this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3362there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3363object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3364BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3365in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
3366@end ifclear
3367
3368@kindex LDEMULATION
3369@cindex default emulation
3370@cindex emulation, default
3371@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3372@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3373behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3374available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3375the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3376variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3377linker was configured.
3378
3379@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3380@cindex demangling, default
3381Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3382@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3383default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3384a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3385may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3386options.
3387
3388@c man end
3389@end ifset
3390
3391@node Scripts
3392@chapter Linker Scripts
3393
3394@cindex scripts
3395@cindex linker scripts
3396@cindex command files
3397Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3398written in the linker command language.
3399
3400The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3401the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3402the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3403more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3404direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3405described below.
3406
3407The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3408yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3409linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3410to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
3411such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3412
3413You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3414line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3415default linker script.
3416
3417You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3418to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3419Linker Scripts}.
3420
3421@menu
3422* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3423* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3424* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3425* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3426* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3427* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3428* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3429* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3430* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3431* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3432* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3433@end menu
3434
3435@node Basic Script Concepts
3436@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3437@cindex linker script concepts
3438We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3439describe the linker script language.
3440
3441The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3442file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3443@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3444The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3445purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3446among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3447section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3448in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3449
3450Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3451also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3452contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3453the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3454A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3455area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3456loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3457which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3458of debugging information.
3459
3460Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3461first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3462the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3463@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3464section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3465same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3466is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3467(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3468based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3469RAM address would be the VMA.
3470
3471You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3472program with the @samp{-h} option.
3473
3474Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3475@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3476has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3477information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3478will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3479static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3480referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3481
3482You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3483program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3484option.
3485
3486@node Script Format
3487@section Linker Script Format
3488@cindex linker script format
3489Linker scripts are text files.
3490
3491You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3492either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3493symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3494generally ignored.
3495
3496Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3497If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3498otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3499double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3500file name.
3501
3502You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3503@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3504to whitespace.
3505
3506@node Simple Example
3507@section Simple Linker Script Example
3508@cindex linker script example
3509@cindex example of linker script
3510Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3511
3512The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3513@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3514memory layout of the output file.
3515
3516The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3517describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3518code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3519@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3520Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3521your input files.
3522
3523For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
35240x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3525linker script which will do that:
3526@smallexample
3527SECTIONS
3528@{
3529 . = 0x10000;
3530 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3531 . = 0x8000000;
3532 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3533 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3534@}
3535@end smallexample
3536
3537You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3538followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3539descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3540
3541The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3542sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3543counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3544other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3545current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3546incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3547@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3548
3549The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3550required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3551after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3552which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3553wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3554means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3555
3556Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3557@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3558@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3559
3560The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3561the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3562at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3563output section, the value of the location counter will be
3564@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3565effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3566immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3567
3568The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3569alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3570example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3571sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3572may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3573sections.
3574
3575That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3576
3577@node Simple Commands
3578@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3579@cindex linker script simple commands
3580In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3581
3582@menu
3583* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3584* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3585@ifclear SingleFormat
3586* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3587@end ifclear
3588
3589* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3590* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3591@end menu
3592
3593@node Entry Point
3594@subsection Setting the Entry Point
3595@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3596@cindex start of execution
3597@cindex first instruction
3598@cindex entry point
3599The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3600point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3601entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3602@smallexample
3603ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3604@end smallexample
3605
3606There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3607entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3608stopping when one of them succeeds:
3609@itemize @bullet
3610@item
3611the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3612@item
3613the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3614@item
3615the value of a target-specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3616targets this is @code{start}, but PE- and BeOS-based systems for example
3617check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3618@item
3619the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3620@item
3621The address @code{0}.
3622@end itemize
3623
3624@node File Commands
3625@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3626@cindex linker script file commands
3627Several linker script commands deal with files.
3628
3629@table @code
3630@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3631@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3632@cindex including a linker script
3633Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3634be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3635with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
363610 levels deep.
3637
3638You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3639@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3640
3641@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3642@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3643@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3644@cindex input files in linker scripts
3645@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3646@cindex linker script input object files
3647The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3648in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3649
3650For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3651a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3652then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3653
3654In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3655script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3656
3657In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3658with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3659located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3660for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3661open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3662linker will search through the archive library search path.
3663The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3664as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3665path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3666@ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3667
3668If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3669name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
3670@samp{-l}.
3671
3672When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3673files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3674script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3675
3676@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3677@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3678@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3679@cindex grouping input files
3680The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3681files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3682new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3683in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3684
3685@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3686@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3687@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3688This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3689commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3690as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3691with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3692when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3693@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3694and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3695setting afterwards.
3696
3697@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3698@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3699@cindex output file name in linker script
3700The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3701@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3702@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3703Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
3704precedence.
3705
3706You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3707output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3708
3709@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3710@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3711@cindex library search path in linker script
3712@cindex archive search path in linker script
3713@cindex search path in linker script
3714The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3715@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3716@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3717on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
3718are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3719the command-line option are searched first.
3720
3721@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3722@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3723@cindex first input file
3724The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3725that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3726though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3727when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3728first file.
3729@end table
3730
3731@ifclear SingleFormat
3732@node Format Commands
3733@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3734A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3735
3736@table @code
3737@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3738@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3739@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3740@cindex output file format in linker script
3741The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3742output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3743exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3744(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
3745line option takes precedence.
3746
3747You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3748formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
3749This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3750desired endianness.
3751
3752If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3753will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3754output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3755used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3756
3757For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3758command:
3759@smallexample
3760OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3761@end smallexample
3762This says that the default format for the output file is
3763@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
3764option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3765format.
3766
3767@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3768@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3769@cindex input file format in linker script
3770The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3771files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3772This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3773(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3774is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3775command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3776@end table
3777@end ifclear
3778
3779@node REGION_ALIAS
3780@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3781@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3782@cindex region alias
3783@cindex region names
3784
3785Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3786@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3787
3788@smallexample
3789REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3790@end smallexample
3791
3792The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3793memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3794to memory regions. An example follows.
3795
3796Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3797memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3798that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3799non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3800access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3801read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3802sections:
3803
3804@itemize @bullet
3805@item
3806@code{.text} program code;
3807@item
3808@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3809@item
3810@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3811@item
3812@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3813@end itemize
3814
3815The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3816part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3817output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3818systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3819@code{C}:
3820@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3821@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3822@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3823@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3824@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3825@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3826@end multitable
3827The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3828loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3829the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3830the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3831
3832The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3833includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3834memory layout:
3835@smallexample
3836INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3837
3838SECTIONS
3839 @{
3840 .text :
3841 @{
3842 *(.text)
3843 @} > REGION_TEXT
3844 .rodata :
3845 @{
3846 *(.rodata)
3847 rodata_end = .;
3848 @} > REGION_RODATA
3849 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3850 @{
3851 data_start = .;
3852 *(.data)
3853 @} > REGION_DATA
3854 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3855 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3856 .bss :
3857 @{
3858 *(.bss)
3859 @} > REGION_BSS
3860 @}
3861@end smallexample
3862
3863Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3864regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3865variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3866@table @code
3867@item A
3868Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3869@smallexample
3870MEMORY
3871 @{
3872 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3873 @}
3874
3875REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3876REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3877REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3878REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3879@end smallexample
3880@item B
3881Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3882into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3883@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3884@smallexample
3885MEMORY
3886 @{
3887 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3888 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3889 @}
3890
3891REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3892REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3893REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3894REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3895@end smallexample
3896@item C
3897Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3898@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3899initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3900system start into the @code{RAM}.
3901@smallexample
3902MEMORY
3903 @{
3904 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3905 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3906 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3907 @}
3908
3909REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3910REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3911REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3912REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3913@end smallexample
3914@end table
3915
3916It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3917@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3918necessary:
3919@smallexample
3920#include <string.h>
3921
3922extern char data_start [];
3923extern char data_size [];
3924extern char data_load_start [];
3925
3926void copy_data(void)
3927@{
3928 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3929 @{
3930 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3931 @}
3932@}
3933@end smallexample
3934
3935@node Miscellaneous Commands
3936@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3937There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3938
3939@table @code
3940@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3941@kindex ASSERT
3942@cindex assertion in linker script
3943Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3944with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3945
3946Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3947take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3948inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3949for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3950symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3951
3952@smallexample
3953 .stack :
3954 @{
3955 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3956 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3957 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3958 @}
3959@end smallexample
3960
3961will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3962PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3963can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3964
3965@smallexample
3966 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3967 .stack :
3968 @{
3969 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3970 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3971 @}
3972@end smallexample
3973
3974will work.
3975
3976@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3977@kindex EXTERN
3978@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3979Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3980symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3981modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3982each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3983command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3984
3985@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3986@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3987@cindex common allocation in linker script
3988This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3989to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3990output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3991
3992@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3993@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3994@cindex common allocation in linker script
3995This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3996command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3997to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3998
3999@item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
4000@kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
4001@cindex group allocation in linker script
4002@cindex section groups
4003@cindex COMDAT
4004This command has the same effect as the
4005@samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
4006@command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
4007and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
4008specified (@samp{-r}).
4009
4010@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
4011@kindex INSERT
4012@cindex insert user script into default script
4013This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
4014augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
4015inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
4016@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
4017default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
4018sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
4019linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
4020insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
4021linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
4022default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
4023of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
4024to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
4025is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
4026
4027@smallexample
4028SECTIONS
4029@{
4030 OVERLAY :
4031 @{
4032 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
4033 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
4034 @}
4035@}
4036INSERT AFTER .text;
4037@end smallexample
4038
4039@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
4040@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
4041@cindex cross references
4042This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
4043references among certain output sections.
4044
4045In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
4046using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
4047will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
4048errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
4049a function defined in the other section.
4050
4051The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
4052@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
4053an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
4054@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
4055names.
4056
4057@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
4058@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
4059@cindex cross references
4060This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
4061references to one section from a list of other sections.
4062
4063The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
4064output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
4065a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
4066there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
4067must never call back.
4068
4069The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
4070The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
4071If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
4072the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
4073status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
4074names, not input section names.
4075
4076@ifclear SingleFormat
4077@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
4078@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
4079@cindex machine architecture
4080@cindex architecture
4081Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
4082of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
4083architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
4084the @samp{-f} option.
4085@end ifclear
4086
4087@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
4088@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
4089This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
4090@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
4091in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
4092@xref{Expression Section}.
4093@end table
4094
4095@node Assignments
4096@section Assigning Values to Symbols
4097@cindex assignment in scripts
4098@cindex symbol definition, scripts
4099@cindex variables, defining
4100You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
4101the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
4102
4103@menu
4104* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
4105* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
4106* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
4107* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4108* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
4109@end menu
4110
4111@node Simple Assignments
4112@subsection Simple Assignments
4113
4114You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
4115
4116@table @code
4117@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
4118@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
4119@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
4120@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
4121@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
4122@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
4123@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
4124@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
4125@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
4126@end table
4127
4128The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
4129@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
4130defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
4131
4132The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
4133may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
4134
4135The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
4136
4137Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
4138
4139You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
4140statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
4141section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
4142
4143The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
4144expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
4145
4146Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
4147assignments may be used:
4148
4149@smallexample
4150floating_point = 0;
4151SECTIONS
4152@{
4153 .text :
4154 @{
4155 *(.text)
4156 _etext = .;
4157 @}
4158 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
4159 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4160@}
4161@end smallexample
4162@noindent
4163In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
4164zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
4165the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
4166defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
4167upward to a 4 byte boundary.
4168
4169@node HIDDEN
4170@subsection HIDDEN
4171@cindex HIDDEN
4172For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
4173exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4174
4175Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
4176@code{HIDDEN}:
4177
4178@smallexample
4179HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
4180SECTIONS
4181@{
4182 .text :
4183 @{
4184 *(.text)
4185 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
4186 @}
4187 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
4188 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4189@}
4190@end smallexample
4191@noindent
4192In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
4193
4194@node PROVIDE
4195@subsection PROVIDE
4196@cindex PROVIDE
4197In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
4198only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
4199the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
4200@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
4201@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
4202@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
4203@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
4204@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4205
4206Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4207@smallexample
4208SECTIONS
4209@{
4210 .text :
4211 @{
4212 *(.text)
4213 _etext = .;
4214 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4215 @}
4216@}
4217@end smallexample
4218
4219In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4220underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4221the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4222underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4223If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4224linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4225
4226Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4227defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4228that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4229when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4230@samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4231
4232@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4233@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4234@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4235Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4236hidden and won't be exported.
4237
4238@node Source Code Reference
4239@subsection Source Code Reference
4240
4241Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4242intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4243a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4244symbol that does not have a value.
4245
4246Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4247transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4248stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4249prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4250mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4251of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4252variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4253linker script variable might be referred to as:
4254
4255@smallexample
4256 extern int foo;
4257@end smallexample
4258
4259But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4260
4261@smallexample
4262 _foo = 1000;
4263@end smallexample
4264
4265In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4266transformation has taken place.
4267
4268When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4269things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4270in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4271second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4272table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4273contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4274value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4275
4276@smallexample
4277 int foo = 1000;
4278@end smallexample
4279
4280creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
4281holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4282number 1000 is initially stored.
4283
4284When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4285first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4286memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4287So:
4288
4289@smallexample
4290 foo = 1;
4291@end smallexample
4292
4293looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4294associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4295address. Whereas:
4296
4297@smallexample
4298 int * a = & foo;
4299@end smallexample
4300
4301looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
4302and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4303the variable @samp{a}.
4304
4305Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4306the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4307an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4308
4309@smallexample
4310 foo = 1000;
4311@end smallexample
4312
4313creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4314the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4315address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4316linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4317access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4318
4319Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4320you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4321use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4322section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4323linker script contains these declarations:
4324
4325@smallexample
4326@group
4327 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
4328 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
4329 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4330@end group
4331@end smallexample
4332
4333Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4334
4335@smallexample
4336@group
4337 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
4338
4339 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4340@end group
4341@end smallexample
4342
4343Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
4344Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4345arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4346
4347@smallexample
4348@group
4349 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4350
4351 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4352@end group
4353@end smallexample
4354
4355Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4356operators.
4357
4358@node SECTIONS
4359@section SECTIONS Command
4360@kindex SECTIONS
4361The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4362into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4363
4364The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4365@smallexample
4366SECTIONS
4367@{
4368 @var{sections-command}
4369 @var{sections-command}
4370 @dots{}
4371@}
4372@end smallexample
4373
4374Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4375
4376@itemize @bullet
4377@item
4378an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4379@item
4380a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4381@item
4382an output section description
4383@item
4384an overlay description
4385@end itemize
4386
4387The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4388@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4389those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4390understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4391the layout of the output file.
4392
4393Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4394below.
4395
4396If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4397linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4398section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4399input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4400example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4401in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4402
4403@menu
4404* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4405* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4406* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4407* Input Section:: Input section description
4408* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4409* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4410* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4411* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4412* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4413@end menu
4414
4415@node Output Section Description
4416@subsection Output Section Description
4417The full description of an output section looks like this:
4418@smallexample
4419@group
4420@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4421 [AT(@var{lma})]
4422 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4423 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4424 [@var{constraint}]
4425 @{
4426 @var{output-section-command}
4427 @var{output-section-command}
4428 @dots{}
4429 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4430@end group
4431@end smallexample
4432
4433Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4434
4435The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4436name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4437The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4438the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4439The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4440
4441Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4442
4443@itemize @bullet
4444@item
4445a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4446@item
4447an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4448@item
4449data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4450@item
4451a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4452@end itemize
4453
4454@node Output Section Name
4455@subsection Output Section Name
4456@cindex name, section
4457@cindex section name
4458The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4459meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4460support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4461must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4462example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4463output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4464names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4465quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4466characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4467commas must be quoted.
4468
4469The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4470Discarding}.
4471
4472@node Output Section Address
4473@subsection Output Section Address
4474@cindex address, section
4475@cindex section address
4476The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4477address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4478is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4479
4480If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4481section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4482to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4483alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4484contained within the output section.
4485
4486The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4487
4488@itemize @bullet
4489@item
4490If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4491is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4492in that region.
4493
4494@item
4495If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4496regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4497section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4498be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4499
4500@item
4501If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4502the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4503counter.
4504@end itemize
4505
4506@noindent
4507For example:
4508
4509@smallexample
4510.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4511@end smallexample
4512
4513@noindent
4514and
4515
4516@smallexample
4517.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4518@end smallexample
4519
4520@noindent
4521are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4522@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4523counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4524counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4525input sections.
4526
4527The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4528For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4529so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4530do something like this:
4531@smallexample
4532.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4533@end smallexample
4534@noindent
4535This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4536aligned upward to the specified value.
4537
4538Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4539location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4540sections are ignored).
4541
4542@node Input Section
4543@subsection Input Section Description
4544@cindex input sections
4545@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4546The most common output section command is an input section description.
4547
4548The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4549You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4550in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4551map the input files into your memory layout.
4552
4553@menu
4554* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4555* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4556* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4557* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4558* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4559@end menu
4560
4561@node Input Section Basics
4562@subsubsection Input Section Basics
4563@cindex input section basics
4564An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4565by a list of section names in parentheses.
4566
4567The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4568describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4569
4570The most common input section description is to include all input
4571sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4572include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4573@smallexample
4574*(.text)
4575@end smallexample
4576@noindent
4577Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4578@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
4579of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4580match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4581example:
4582@smallexample
4583EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4584@end smallexample
4585@noindent
4586will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4587and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4588placed inside the section list, for example:
4589@smallexample
4590*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4591@end smallexample
4592@noindent
4593The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4594two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4595more than one section, as described below.
4596
4597There are two ways to include more than one section:
4598@smallexample
4599*(.text .rdata)
4600*(.text) *(.rdata)
4601@end smallexample
4602@noindent
4603The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4604@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4605first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4606they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4607@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4608@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4609
4610When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4611is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4612immediately following section, for example:
4613@smallexample
4614*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4615@end smallexample
4616@noindent
4617will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4618@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4619from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4620exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
4621could be modified to:
4622@smallexample
4623*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4624@end smallexample
4625@noindent
4626Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4627before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4628all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4629@smallexample
4630EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4631@end smallexample
4632
4633You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4634You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4635needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4636@smallexample
4637data.o(.data)
4638@end smallexample
4639
4640To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4641of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4642
4643Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4644
4645@smallexample
4646@group
4647SECTIONS @{
4648 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4649 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4650@}
4651@end group
4652@end smallexample
4653
4654In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4655input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4656@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4657@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4658whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4659
4660You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4661matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4662with no whitespace around the colon.
4663
4664@table @samp
4665@item archive:file
4666matches file within archive
4667@item archive:
4668matches the whole archive
4669@item :file
4670matches file but not one in an archive
4671@end table
4672
4673Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4674wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4675single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4676@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4677within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4678also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4679other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4680from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4681command.
4682
4683If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4684the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4685commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4686@smallexample
4687data.o
4688@end smallexample
4689
4690When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4691and does not contain any wild card
4692characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4693name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4694did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4695though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4696@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4697the archive search path.
4698
4699@node Input Section Wildcards
4700@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4701@cindex input section wildcards
4702@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4703@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4704@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4705In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4706name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4707
4708The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4709pattern for the file name.
4710
4711The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4712
4713@table @samp
4714@item *
4715matches any number of characters
4716@item ?
4717matches any single character
4718@item [@var{chars}]
4719matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4720character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4721@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4722@item \
4723quotes the following character
4724@end table
4725
4726When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4727will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4728Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4729exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4730@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4731a @samp{/} character.
4732
4733File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4734specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4735does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4736
4737If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4738appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4739will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4740sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4741@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4742@smallexample
4743.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4744.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4745@end smallexample
4746
4747@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4748Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4749in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4750this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4751pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4752@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4753into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4754
4755@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4756@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4757@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into descending order of
4758alignment before placing them in the output file. Placing larger
4759alignments before smaller alignments can reduce the amount of padding
4760needed.
4761
4762@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4763@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is also similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4764@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into ascending
4765numerical order of the GCC init_priority attribute encoded in the
4766section name before placing them in the output file. In
4767@code{.init_array.NNNNN} and @code{.fini_array.NNNNN}, @code{NNNNN} is
4768the init_priority. In @code{.ctors.NNNNN} and @code{.dtors.NNNNN},
4769@code{NNNNN} is 65535 minus the init_priority.
4770
4771@cindex SORT
4772@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4773
4774When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4775can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4776
4777@enumerate
4778@item
4779@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4780It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4781sections have the same name.
4782@item
4783@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4784It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4785sections have the same alignment.
4786@item
4787@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4788treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4789@item
4790@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4791is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4792@item
4793All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4794@end enumerate
4795
4796When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
4797section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4798takes precedence over the command-line option.
4799
4800If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4801command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
4802treated as nested sorting command.
4803
4804@enumerate
4805@item
4806@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4807@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4808@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4809@item
4810@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4811@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4812@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4813@end enumerate
4814
4815If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4816command-line option will be ignored.
4817
4818@cindex SORT_NONE
4819@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
4820section sorting option.
4821
4822If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4823@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4824precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4825
4826This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4827files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4828sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4829The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4830with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4831linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4832@smallexample
4833@group
4834SECTIONS @{
4835 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4836 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4837 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4838 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4839@}
4840@end group
4841@end smallexample
4842
4843@node Input Section Common
4844@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4845@cindex common symbol placement
4846@cindex uninitialized data placement
4847A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4848file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4849linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4850named @samp{COMMON}.
4851
4852You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4853other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4854particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4855input files are placed in another section.
4856
4857In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4858@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4859@smallexample
4860.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4861@end smallexample
4862
4863@cindex scommon section
4864@cindex small common symbols
4865Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4866example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4867symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4868different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4869the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4870symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4871to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4872locations.
4873
4874@cindex [COMMON]
4875You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4876notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4877@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4878
4879@node Input Section Keep
4880@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4881@cindex KEEP
4882@cindex garbage collection
4883When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4884it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4885This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4886with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4887@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4888
4889@node Input Section Example
4890@subsubsection Input Section Example
4891The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4892to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4893start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4894@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4895follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4896@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4897@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4898All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4899files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4900
4901@smallexample
4902@group
4903SECTIONS @{
4904 outputa 0x10000 :
4905 @{
4906 all.o
4907 foo.o (.input1)
4908 @}
4909@end group
4910@group
4911 outputb :
4912 @{
4913 foo.o (.input2)
4914 foo1.o (.input1)
4915 @}
4916@end group
4917@group
4918 outputc :
4919 @{
4920 *(.input1)
4921 *(.input2)
4922 @}
4923@}
4924@end group
4925@end smallexample
4926
4927If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4928and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4929automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4930__stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4931indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4932respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4933C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4934
4935@node Output Section Data
4936@subsection Output Section Data
4937@cindex data
4938@cindex section data
4939@cindex output section data
4940@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4941@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4942@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4943@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4944@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4945You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4946@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4947an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4948parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4949value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4950counter.
4951
4952The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4953store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4954bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4955stored.
4956
4957For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4958of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4959@smallexample
4960BYTE(1)
4961LONG(addr)
4962@end smallexample
4963
4964When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4965same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4966target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4967@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4968@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4969
4970If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4971which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4972When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4973true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4974endianness of the first input object file.
4975
4976Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4977between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4978@smallexample
4979SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4980@end smallexample
4981whereas this will work:
4982@smallexample
4983SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4984@end smallexample
4985
4986@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4987@cindex holes, filling
4988@cindex unspecified memory
4989You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4990current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4991otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4992gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4993with the value of the expression, repeated as
4994necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4995point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4996than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4997different parts of an output section.
4998
4999This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
5000value @samp{0x90}:
5001@smallexample
5002FILL(0x90909090)
5003@end smallexample
5004
5005The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
5006section attribute, but it only affects the
5007part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
5008entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
5009precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
5010expression.
5011
5012@node Output Section Keywords
5013@subsection Output Section Keywords
5014There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
5015commands.
5016
5017@table @code
5018@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
5019@cindex input filename symbols
5020@cindex filename symbols
5021@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
5022The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
5023The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
5024file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
5025the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
5026
5027This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
5028normally used for any other object file format.
5029
5030@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
5031@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
5032@cindex constructors, arranging in link
5033@item CONSTRUCTORS
5034When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
5035unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
5036destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
5037arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
5038automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
5039For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
5040linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
5041@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
5042ignored for other object file formats.
5043
5044The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
5045constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
5046Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
5047the start and end of the global destructors. The
5048first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
5049of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
5050compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
5051formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
5052@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
5053the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
5054destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
5055@code{exit}.
5056
5057For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
5058arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
5059addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
5060and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
5061linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
5062runtime code expects to see.
5063
5064@smallexample
5065 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
5066 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
5067 *(.ctors)
5068 LONG(0)
5069 __CTOR_END__ = .;
5070 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
5071 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
5072 *(.dtors)
5073 LONG(0)
5074 __DTOR_END__ = .;
5075@end smallexample
5076
5077If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
5078which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
5079are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
5080are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
5081command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
5082@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
5083@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
5084@samp{*(.dtors)}.
5085
5086Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
5087and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
5088need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
5089scripts.
5090
5091@end table
5092
5093@node Output Section Discarding
5094@subsection Output Section Discarding
5095@cindex discarding sections
5096@cindex sections, discarding
5097@cindex removing sections
5098The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
5099This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
5100may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
5101@smallexample
5102.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
5103@end smallexample
5104@noindent
5105will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
5106@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
5107sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
5108space in an output section will also create the output section. So
5109too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
5110space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
5111@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
5112@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
5113This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
5114
5115The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
5116on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
5117symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
5118the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
5119section is discarded.
5120
5121@cindex /DISCARD/
5122The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
5123input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
5124section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
5125
5126Note, sections that match the @samp{/DISCARD/} output section will be
5127discarded even if they are in an ELF section group which has other
5128members which are not being discarded. This is deliberate.
5129Discarding takes precedence over grouping.
5130
5131@node Output Section Attributes
5132@subsection Output Section Attributes
5133@cindex output section attributes
5134We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
5135like this:
5136
5137@smallexample
5138@group
5139@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
5140 [AT(@var{lma})]
5141 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
5142 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
5143 [@var{constraint}]
5144 @{
5145 @var{output-section-command}
5146 @var{output-section-command}
5147 @dots{}
5148 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
5149@end group
5150@end smallexample
5151
5152We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
5153@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
5154remaining section attributes.
5155
5156@menu
5157* Output Section Type:: Output section type
5158* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
5159* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
5160* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
5161* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
5162* Output Section Region:: Output section region
5163* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
5164* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
5165@end menu
5166
5167@node Output Section Type
5168@subsubsection Output Section Type
5169Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
5170parentheses. The following types are defined:
5171
5172@table @code
5173@item NOLOAD
5174The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
5175loaded into memory when the program is run.
5176@item DSECT
5177@itemx COPY
5178@itemx INFO
5179@itemx OVERLAY
5180These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
5181rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
5182marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
5183section when the program is run.
5184@end table
5185
5186@kindex NOLOAD
5187@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
5188@cindex loading, preventing
5189The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
5190the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
5191the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
5192@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
5193need to be loaded when the program is run.
5194@smallexample
5195@group
5196SECTIONS @{
5197 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
5198 @dots{}
5199@}
5200@end group
5201@end smallexample
5202
5203@node Output Section LMA
5204@subsubsection Output Section LMA
5205@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
5206@kindex AT(@var{lma})
5207@cindex load address
5208@cindex section load address
5209Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
5210@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
5211@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
5212specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
5213address is optional.
5214
5215The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5216specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5217takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5218load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5219region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
5220
5221If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
5222section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5223load address:
5224
5225@itemize @bullet
5226@item
5227If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5228the LMA address as well.
5229
5230@item
5231If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5232
5233@item
5234Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5235with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5236section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5237VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5238the last section in the located region.
5239
5240@item
5241If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5242that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5243
5244@item
5245If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5246section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5247@end itemize
5248
5249@cindex ROM initialized data
5250@cindex initialized data in ROM
5251This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5252example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5253called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5254@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5255even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5256uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5257defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5258counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5259
5260@smallexample
5261@group
5262SECTIONS
5263 @{
5264 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
5265 .mdata 0x2000 :
5266 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5267 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5268 .bss 0x3000 :
5269 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5270@}
5271@end group
5272@end smallexample
5273
5274The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5275this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5276the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5277how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5278script.
5279
5280@smallexample
5281@group
5282extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5283char *src = &_etext;
5284char *dst = &_data;
5285
5286/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5287while (dst < &_edata)
5288 *dst++ = *src++;
5289
5290/* Zero bss. */
5291for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5292 *dst = 0;
5293@end group
5294@end smallexample
5295
5296@node Forced Output Alignment
5297@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5298@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5299@cindex forcing output section alignment
5300@cindex output section alignment
5301You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
5302alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5303intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
5304
5305@node Forced Input Alignment
5306@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5307@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5308@cindex forcing input section alignment
5309@cindex input section alignment
5310You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5311SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5312sections, whether larger or smaller.
5313
5314@node Output Section Constraint
5315@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5316@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5317@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5318@cindex constraints on output sections
5319You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5320of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5321read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5322@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5323
5324@node Output Section Region
5325@subsubsection Output Section Region
5326@kindex >@var{region}
5327@cindex section, assigning to memory region
5328@cindex memory regions and sections
5329You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5330using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5331
5332Here is a simple example:
5333@smallexample
5334@group
5335MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5336SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5337@end group
5338@end smallexample
5339
5340@node Output Section Phdr
5341@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
5342@kindex :@var{phdr}
5343@cindex section, assigning to program header
5344@cindex program headers and sections
5345You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5346using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5347one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5348assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5349@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5350linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5351
5352Here is a simple example:
5353@smallexample
5354@group
5355PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5356SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5357@end group
5358@end smallexample
5359
5360@node Output Section Fill
5361@subsubsection Output Section Fill
5362@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5363@cindex section fill pattern
5364@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5365You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5366@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5367(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5368within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
5369alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5370necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
5371of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
5372an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5373fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
5374other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
5375pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5376expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
5377
5378You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
5379output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
5380
5381Here is a simple example:
5382@smallexample
5383@group
5384SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
5385@end group
5386@end smallexample
5387
5388@node Overlay Description
5389@subsection Overlay Description
5390@kindex OVERLAY
5391@cindex overlays
5392An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5393are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5394the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5395copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5396required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5397can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5398than another.
5399
5400Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5401@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5402output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5403command is as follows:
5404@smallexample
5405@group
5406OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5407 @{
5408 @var{secname1}
5409 @{
5410 @var{output-section-command}
5411 @var{output-section-command}
5412 @dots{}
5413 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5414 @var{secname2}
5415 @{
5416 @var{output-section-command}
5417 @var{output-section-command}
5418 @dots{}
5419 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5420 @dots{}
5421 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
5422@end group
5423@end smallexample
5424
5425Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5426section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5427section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
5428those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
5429except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5430sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5431
5432The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5433the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5434
5435The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5436addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5437memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5438whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5439and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5440and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5441
5442If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5443references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5444the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5445sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5446@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
5447
5448For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
5449provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
5450defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5451@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5452the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5453within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5454symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5455
5456At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5457the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5458
5459Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5460@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5461@smallexample
5462@group
5463 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5464 @{
5465 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5466 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5467 @}
5468@end group
5469@end smallexample
5470@noindent
5471This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5472address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5473@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5474following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5475@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5476@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5477
5478C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5479like the following.
5480
5481@smallexample
5482@group
5483 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5484 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5485 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5486@end group
5487@end smallexample
5488
5489Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5490everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5491example could have been written identically as follows.
5492
5493@smallexample
5494@group
5495 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5496 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5497 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5498 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5499 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5500 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5501 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5502@end group
5503@end smallexample
5504
5505@node MEMORY
5506@section MEMORY Command
5507@kindex MEMORY
5508@cindex memory regions
5509@cindex regions of memory
5510@cindex allocating memory
5511@cindex discontinuous memory
5512The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5513memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5514
5515The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5516memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5517may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5518can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5519set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5520regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5521around to fit into the available regions.
5522
5523A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5524however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5525specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5526@code{MEMORY} is:
5527@smallexample
5528@group
5529MEMORY
5530 @{
5531 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5532 @dots{}
5533 @}
5534@end group
5535@end smallexample
5536
5537The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5538region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5539Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5540with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5541must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5542add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5543command.
5544
5545@cindex memory region attributes
5546The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5547whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5548not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5549@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5550section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5551the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5552them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5553
5554The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5555@table @samp
5556@item R
5557Read-only section
5558@item W
5559Read/write section
5560@item X
5561Executable section
5562@item A
5563Allocatable section
5564@item I
5565Initialized section
5566@item L
5567Same as @samp{I}
5568@item !
5569Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5570@end table
5571
5572If an unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5573@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5574attribute reverses the test for the characters that follow, so that an
5575unmapped section will be placed in the memory region only if it does
5576not match any of the attributes listed afterwards. Thus an attribute
5577string of @samp{RW!X} will match any unmapped section that has either
5578or both of the @samp{R} and @samp{W} attributes, but only as long as
5579the section does not also have the @samp{X} attribute.
5580
5581@kindex ORIGIN =
5582@kindex o =
5583@kindex org =
5584The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5585the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5586cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5587abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5588@code{ORG}).
5589
5590@kindex LENGTH =
5591@kindex len =
5592@kindex l =
5593The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5594region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5595be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5596@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5597
5598In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5599available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5600and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5601linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5602is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5603or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5604explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5605region.
5606
5607@smallexample
5608@group
5609MEMORY
5610 @{
5611 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5612 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5613 @}
5614@end group
5615@end smallexample
5616
5617Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5618specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5619@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5620a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5621output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5622was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5623the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5624output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5625region, the linker will issue an error message.
5626
5627It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5628expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5629@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5630
5631@smallexample
5632@group
5633 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5634@end group
5635@end smallexample
5636
5637@node PHDRS
5638@section PHDRS Command
5639@kindex PHDRS
5640@cindex program headers
5641@cindex ELF program headers
5642@cindex program segments
5643@cindex segments, ELF
5644The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5645@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5646loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5647program with the @samp{-p} option.
5648
5649When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5650reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5651program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5652This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5653interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5654
5655The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5656in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5657precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5658the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5659not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5660
5661The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5662generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5663ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5664
5665This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5666@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5667
5668@smallexample
5669@group
5670PHDRS
5671@{
5672 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5673 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5674@}
5675@end group
5676@end smallexample
5677
5678The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5679of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5680header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5681with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5682must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5683is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5684
5685Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5686system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5687specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5688sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5689attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5690Section Phdr}.
5691
5692It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5693merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5694repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5695contain the section.
5696
5697If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5698then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5699not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5700convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5701placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5702default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5703segment at all.
5704
5705@kindex FILEHDR
5706@kindex PHDRS
5707You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5708the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5709The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5710file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5711include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5712segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5713these keywords.
5714
5715The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5716value of the keyword.
5717
5718@table @asis
5719@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5720Indicates an unused program header.
5721
5722@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5723Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5724the file.
5725
5726@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5727Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5728
5729@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5730Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5731found.
5732
5733@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5734Indicates a segment holding note information.
5735
5736@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5737A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5738ABI.
5739
5740@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5741Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5742
5743@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5744Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5745
5746@item @var{expression}
5747An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5748be used for types not defined above.
5749@end table
5750
5751You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5752in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5753@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5754Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5755output section attribute.
5756
5757The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5758which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5759explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5760an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5761header.
5762
5763Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5764headers used on a native ELF system.
5765
5766@example
5767@group
5768PHDRS
5769@{
5770 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5771 interp PT_INTERP ;
5772 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5773 data PT_LOAD ;
5774 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5775@}
5776
5777SECTIONS
5778@{
5779 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5780 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5781 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5782 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5783 @dots{}
5784 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5785 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5786 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5787 @dots{}
5788@}
5789@end group
5790@end example
5791
5792@node VERSION
5793@section VERSION Command
5794@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5795@cindex symbol versions
5796@cindex version script
5797@cindex versions of symbols
5798The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5799only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5800symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5801a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5802shared library.
5803
5804You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5805you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5806also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5807
5808The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5809@smallexample
5810VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5811@end smallexample
5812
5813The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5814Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5815version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5816version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5817version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5818scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5819library.
5820
5821The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5822examples.
5823
5824@smallexample
5825VERS_1.1 @{
5826 global:
5827 foo1;
5828 local:
5829 old*;
5830 original*;
5831 new*;
5832@};
5833
5834VERS_1.2 @{
5835 foo2;
5836@} VERS_1.1;
5837
5838VERS_2.0 @{
5839 bar1; bar2;
5840 extern "C++" @{
5841 ns::*;
5842 "f(int, double)";
5843 @};
5844@} VERS_1.2;
5845@end smallexample
5846
5847This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5848version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5849The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5850a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5851of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5852symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5853is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5854in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5855However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5856name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5857
5858Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5859depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5860to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5861
5862Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5863depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5864and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5865
5866When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5867specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5868unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5869unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5870somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5871wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5872wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5873set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5874ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5875
5876The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5877they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5878could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5879However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5880
5881Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5882in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5883symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5884won't.
5885
5886@smallexample
5887@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5888@end smallexample
5889
5890When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5891symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5892requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5893shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5894loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5895linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5896application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5897way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5898all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5899search for each symbol reference.
5900
5901The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5902doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5903that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5904functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5905the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5906required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5907that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5908versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5909the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5910
5911There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5912first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5913source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5914script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5915maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5916@smallexample
5917__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5918@end smallexample
5919@noindent
5920in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5921be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5922The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5923@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5924takes precedence over a version script.
5925
5926The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5927function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5928an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5929version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5930linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5931
5932To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5933source file. Here is an example:
5934
5935@smallexample
5936__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5937__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5938__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5939__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5940@end smallexample
5941
5942In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5943unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5944example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5945@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5946
5947When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5948some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5949this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5950@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5951declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5952you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5953
5954If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5955within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5956(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5957specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5958
5959You can also specify the language in the version script:
5960
5961@smallexample
5962VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5963@end smallexample
5964
5965The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5966The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5967demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5968patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5969@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5970
5971Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5972described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5973or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5974the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5975whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5976cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5977might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5978should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5979expect when you upgrade.
5980
5981@node Expressions
5982@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5983@cindex expressions
5984@cindex arithmetic
5985The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5986that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5987expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5988host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5989
5990You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5991
5992The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5993expressions.
5994
5995@menu
5996* Constants:: Constants
5997* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5998* Symbols:: Symbol Names
5999* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
6000* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
6001* Operators:: Operators
6002* Evaluation:: Evaluation
6003* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
6004* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
6005@end menu
6006
6007@node Constants
6008@subsection Constants
6009@cindex integer notation
6010@cindex constants in linker scripts
6011All constants are integers.
6012
6013As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
6014octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
6015hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
6016@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
6017@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
6018value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
6019
6020@cindex scaled integers
6021@cindex K and M integer suffixes
6022@cindex M and K integer suffixes
6023@cindex suffixes for integers
6024@cindex integer suffixes
6025In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
6026constant by
6027@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6028@ifnottex
6029@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6030@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
6031@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6032@end ifnottex
6033@tex
6034${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
6035@end tex
6036@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6037respectively. For example, the following
6038all refer to the same quantity:
6039
6040@smallexample
6041_fourk_1 = 4K;
6042_fourk_2 = 4096;
6043_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
6044_fourk_4 = 10000o;
6045@end smallexample
6046
6047Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
6048conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
6049
6050@node Symbolic Constants
6051@subsection Symbolic Constants
6052@cindex symbolic constants
6053@kindex CONSTANT
6054It is possible to refer to target-specific constants via the use of
6055the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
6056
6057@table @code
6058@item MAXPAGESIZE
6059@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
6060The target's maximum page size.
6061
6062@item COMMONPAGESIZE
6063@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
6064The target's default page size.
6065@end table
6066
6067So for example:
6068
6069@smallexample
6070 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
6071@end smallexample
6072
6073will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
6074supported by the target.
6075
6076@node Symbols
6077@subsection Symbol Names
6078@cindex symbol names
6079@cindex names
6080@cindex quoted symbol names
6081@kindex "
6082Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
6083and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
6084Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
6085specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
6086keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
6087@smallexample
6088"SECTION" = 9;
6089"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
6090@end smallexample
6091
6092Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
6093to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
6094whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
6095
6096@node Orphan Sections
6097@subsection Orphan Sections
6098@cindex orphan
6099Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
6100are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
6101script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
6102output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
6103in which to place the orphaned input section.
6104
6105If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
6106an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
6107placed at the end of that output section.
6108
6109If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
6110sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
6111name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
6112orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
6113one new output section.
6114
6115If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
6116then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
6117in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
6118linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
6119attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
6120sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
6121support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
6122
6123The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
6124(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
6125output sections an orphan is placed in.
6126
6127@node Location Counter
6128@subsection The Location Counter
6129@kindex .
6130@cindex dot
6131@cindex location counter
6132@cindex current output location
6133The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
6134current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
6135location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
6136within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
6137anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
6138
6139@cindex holes
6140Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
6141moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
6142location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
6143and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
6144doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
6145
6146@smallexample
6147SECTIONS
6148@{
6149 output :
6150 @{
6151 file1(.text)
6152 . = . + 1000;
6153 file2(.text)
6154 . += 1000;
6155 file3(.text)
6156 @} = 0x12345678;
6157@}
6158@end smallexample
6159@noindent
6160In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
6161located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
6162followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
6163@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
6164@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
6165specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
6166
6167@cindex dot inside sections
6168Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
6169current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
6170statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
6171absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
6172however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
6173not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
6174
6175@smallexample
6176SECTIONS
6177@{
6178 . = 0x100
6179 .text: @{
6180 *(.text)
6181 . = 0x200
6182 @}
6183 . = 0x500
6184 .data: @{
6185 *(.data)
6186 . += 0x600
6187 @}
6188@}
6189@end smallexample
6190
6191The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
6192and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
6193the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
6194much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
6195move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
6196and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
6197the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
6198the @samp{.data} output section itself.
6199
6200@cindex dot outside sections
6201Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
6202output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
6203needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
6204
6205@smallexample
6206SECTIONS
6207@{
6208 start_of_text = . ;
6209 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6210 end_of_text = . ;
6211
6212 start_of_data = . ;
6213 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6214 end_of_data = . ;
6215@}
6216@end smallexample
6217
6218If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6219not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6220between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6221should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6222blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6223the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6224sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6225statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6226special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6227place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6228as follows:
6229
6230@smallexample
6231SECTIONS
6232@{
6233 start_of_text = . ;
6234 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6235 end_of_text = . ;
6236
6237 start_of_data = . ;
6238 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6239 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6240 end_of_data = . ;
6241@}
6242@end smallexample
6243
6244This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6245@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6246placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6247assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6248a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6249section. So you could write:
6250
6251@smallexample
6252SECTIONS
6253@{
6254 start_of_text = . ;
6255 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6256 end_of_text = . ;
6257
6258 . = . ;
6259 start_of_data = . ;
6260 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6261 end_of_data = . ;
6262@}
6263@end smallexample
6264
6265Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6266@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6267
6268@need 2000
6269@node Operators
6270@subsection Operators
6271@cindex operators for arithmetic
6272@cindex arithmetic operators
6273@cindex precedence in expressions
6274The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6275the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6276@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6277@ifnottex
6278@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6279@smallexample
6280precedence associativity Operators Notes
6281(highest)
62821 left ! - ~ (1)
62832 left * / %
62843 left + -
62854 left >> <<
62865 left == != > < <= >=
62876 left &
62887 left |
62898 left &&
62909 left ||
629110 right ? :
629211 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6293(lowest)
6294@end smallexample
6295Notes:
6296(1) Prefix operators
6297(2) @xref{Assignments}.
6298@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6299@end ifnottex
6300@tex
6301\vskip \baselineskip
6302%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6303\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6304\hrule
6305\halign
6306{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6307height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6308&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6309height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6310\noalign{\hrule}
6311height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6312&highest&&&&&\cr
6313% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
6314&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
6315&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6316&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6317&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6318&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6319&6&&left&&\&&\cr
6320&7&&left&&|&\cr
6321&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6322&9&&left&&||&\cr
6323&10&&right&&? :&\cr
6324&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6325&lowest&&&&&\cr
6326height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6327\hrule}
6328@end tex
6329@iftex
6330{
6331@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6332@dag@quad Prefix operators.
6333@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6334}
6335@end iftex
6336@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6337
6338@node Evaluation
6339@subsection Evaluation
6340@cindex lazy evaluation
6341@cindex expression evaluation order
6342The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6343an expression when absolutely necessary.
6344
6345The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6346address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6347regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6348as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6349
6350However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6351until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6352other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6353for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6354
6355The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6356assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6357allocation.
6358
6359Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6360@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6361
6362If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6363available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6364following
6365@smallexample
6366@group
6367SECTIONS
6368 @{
6369 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
6370 @{ *(.text) @}
6371 @}
6372@end group
6373@end smallexample
6374@noindent
6375will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6376address}.
6377
6378@node Expression Section
6379@subsection The Section of an Expression
6380@cindex expression sections
6381@cindex absolute expressions
6382@cindex relative expressions
6383@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6384@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6385@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
6386Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6387relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6388using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6389value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6390symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6391operations.
6392
6393Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6394section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6395address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6396@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6397functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
6398One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6399(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
6400differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6401versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6402section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6403Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
6404absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6405given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6406everywhere.
6407
6408In the following simple example,
6409
6410@smallexample
6411@group
6412SECTIONS
6413 @{
6414 . = 0x100;
6415 __executable_start = 0x100;
6416 .data :
6417 @{
6418 . = 0x10;
6419 __data_start = 0x10;
6420 *(.data)
6421 @}
6422 @dots{}
6423 @}
6424@end group
6425@end smallexample
6426
6427both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6428address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6429@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6430section in the second two assignments.
6431
6432For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6433addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
6434
6435@itemize @bullet
6436@item
6437Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6438operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6439absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6440@item
6441Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6442relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6443and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6444@item
6445Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6446in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6447address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6448before applying the operator.
6449@end itemize
6450
6451The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6452
6453@itemize @bullet
6454@item
6455An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6456@item
6457The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6458@item
6459The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
6460relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
6461(after above conversions) is also a number when
6462@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6463but an absolute address otherwise.
6464@item
6465The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6466relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6467section as the relative operand(s).
6468@item
6469The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6470conversions) is an absolute address.
6471@end itemize
6472
6473You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6474to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6475create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6476section @samp{.data}:
6477@smallexample
6478SECTIONS
6479 @{
6480 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6481 @}
6482@end smallexample
6483@noindent
6484If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6485@samp{.data} section.
6486
6487Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6488particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6489
6490@node Builtin Functions
6491@subsection Builtin Functions
6492@cindex functions in expressions
6493The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6494use in linker script expressions.
6495
6496@table @code
6497@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6498@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6499@cindex expression, absolute
6500Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6501of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6502value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6503normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6504
6505@item ADDR(@var{section})
6506@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6507@cindex section address in expression
6508Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6509script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6510the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6511@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6512@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6513the other two will be absolute:
6514@smallexample
6515@group
6516SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6517 .output1 :
6518 @{
6519 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6520 @dots{}
6521 @}
6522 .output :
6523 @{
6524 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6525 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6526 @}
6527@dots{} @}
6528@end group
6529@end smallexample
6530
6531@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6532@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6533@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6534@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6535@cindex round up location counter
6536@cindex align location counter
6537@cindex round up expression
6538@cindex align expression
6539Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6540to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6541doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6542arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6543expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6544equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6545
6546Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6547next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6548variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6549input sections:
6550@smallexample
6551@group
6552SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6553 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6554 *(.data)
6555 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6556 @}
6557@dots{} @}
6558@end group
6559@end smallexample
6560@noindent
6561The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6562a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6563a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6564of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6565
6566The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6567
6568@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6569@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6570@cindex section alignment
6571Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6572been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6573evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6574the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6575value in that section.
6576@smallexample
6577@group
6578SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6579 .output @{
6580 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6581 @dots{}
6582 @}
6583@dots{} @}
6584@end group
6585@end smallexample
6586
6587@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6588@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6589This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6590scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6591section.
6592
6593@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6594@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6595This is equivalent to either
6596@smallexample
6597(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6598@end smallexample
6599or
6600@smallexample
6601(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6602 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6603@end smallexample
6604@noindent
6605depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6606for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6607@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6608If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6609memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6610bytes in the on-disk file.
6611
6612This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6613any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6614@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6615be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6616running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6617that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6618page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
6619
6620@noindent
6621Example:
6622@smallexample
6623 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6624@end smallexample
6625
6626@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6627@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6628This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6629evaluation purposes.
6630
6631@smallexample
6632 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6633@end smallexample
6634
6635@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6636@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6637This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6638@samp{-z relro} option is used.
6639When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6640does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6641@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6642argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6643script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6644@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6645padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6646section alignment.
6647
6648@smallexample
6649 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6650@end smallexample
6651
6652@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6653@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6654@cindex symbol defaults
6655Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6656defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6657return 0. You can use this function to provide
6658default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6659shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6660the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6661existed, its value is preserved:
6662
6663@smallexample
6664@group
6665SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6666 .text : @{
6667 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6668 @dots{}
6669 @}
6670 @dots{}
6671@}
6672@end group
6673@end smallexample
6674
6675@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6676@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6677Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6678
6679@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6680@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6681@cindex section load address in expression
6682Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6683Section LMA}).
6684
6685@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6686@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6687Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6688@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6689
6690@kindex MAX
6691@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6692Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6693
6694@kindex MIN
6695@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6696Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6697
6698@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6699@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6700@cindex unallocated address, next
6701Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6702This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6703use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6704output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6705
6706@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6707@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6708Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6709
6710@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6711@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6712Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6713value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6714@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6715will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6716can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6717``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6718name.
6719
6720@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6721@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6722@cindex section size
6723Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6724been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6725evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6726@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6727@smallexample
6728@group
6729SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6730 .output @{
6731 .start = . ;
6732 @dots{}
6733 .end = . ;
6734 @}
6735 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6736 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6737@dots{} @}
6738@end group
6739@end smallexample
6740
6741@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6742@itemx sizeof_headers
6743@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6744@cindex header size
6745Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6746information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6747this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6748choose, to facilitate paging.
6749
6750@cindex not enough room for program headers
6751@cindex program headers, not enough room
6752When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6753@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6754number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6755addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6756additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6757room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6758the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6759script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6760you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6761command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6762@end table
6763
6764@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6765@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6766@cindex implicit linker scripts
6767If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6768an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6769linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6770linker will report an error.
6771
6772An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6773
6774Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6775assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6776commands.
6777
6778Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6779at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6780read. This can affect archive searching.
6781
6782@ifset GENERIC
6783@node Machine Dependent
6784@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6785
6786@cindex machine dependencies
6787@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6788sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6789functionality are not listed.
6790
6791@menu
6792@ifset H8300
6793* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6794@end ifset
6795@ifset M68HC11
6796* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6797@end ifset
6798@ifset ARM
6799* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6800@end ifset
6801@ifset HPPA
6802* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6803@end ifset
6804@ifset M68K
6805* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6806@end ifset
6807@ifset MIPS
6808* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6809@end ifset
6810@ifset MMIX
6811* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6812@end ifset
6813@ifset MSP430
6814* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6815@end ifset
6816@ifset NDS32
6817* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6818@end ifset
6819@ifset NIOSII
6820* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6821@end ifset
6822@ifset POWERPC
6823* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6824@end ifset
6825@ifset POWERPC64
6826* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6827@end ifset
6828@ifset S/390
6829* S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6830@end ifset
6831@ifset SPU
6832* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6833@end ifset
6834@ifset TICOFF
6835* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6836@end ifset
6837@ifset WIN32
6838* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6839@end ifset
6840@ifset XTENSA
6841* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6842@end ifset
6843@end menu
6844@end ifset
6845
6846@ifset H8300
6847@ifclear GENERIC
6848@raisesections
6849@end ifclear
6850
6851@node H8/300
6852@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6853
6854@cindex H8/300 support
6855For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6856you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6857
6858@table @emph
6859@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6860@item relaxing address modes
6861@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6862targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6863program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6864respectively.
6865
6866@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6867@item synthesizing instructions
6868@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6869@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6870sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6871page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6872(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6873@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6874top page of memory).
6875
6876@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6877indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6878displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6879the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6880@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6881whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6882range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6883
6884@item bit manipulation instructions
6885@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6886biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6887which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6888page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6889(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6890@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6891the top page of memory).
6892
6893@item system control instructions
6894@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
689532 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6896changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6897(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6898@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6899the top page of memory).
6900@end table
6901
6902@ifclear GENERIC
6903@lowersections
6904@end ifclear
6905@end ifset
6906
6907@ifclear GENERIC
6908@ifset Renesas
6909@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6910@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6911@node Renesas
6912@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6913
6914@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6915H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6916options are required for these chips.
6917@end ifset
6918@end ifclear
6919
6920@ifset ARM
6921@ifclear GENERIC
6922@raisesections
6923@end ifclear
6924
6925@ifset M68HC11
6926@ifclear GENERIC
6927@raisesections
6928@end ifclear
6929
6930@node M68HC11/68HC12
6931@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6932
6933@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6934
6935@subsection Linker Relaxation
6936
6937For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6938optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6939
6940@table @emph
6941@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6942@item relaxing address modes
6943@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6944targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6945program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6946respectively.
6947
6948@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6949transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6950page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6951
6952@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6953When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6954of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6955addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6956@code{bset} instructions.
6957
6958@end table
6959
6960@subsection Trampoline Generation
6961
6962@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6963@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6964For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6965call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6966will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6967trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6968case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6969point to the function trampoline.
6970
6971@ifclear GENERIC
6972@lowersections
6973@end ifclear
6974@end ifset
6975
6976@node ARM
6977@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6978
6979@cindex ARM interworking support
6980@kindex --support-old-code
6981For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6982between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6983been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6984line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6985libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6986option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
6987given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6988which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6989the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6990non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6991
6992@cindex thumb entry point
6993@cindex entry point, thumb
6994@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6995The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6996@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6997But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6998branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6999executing in Thumb mode straight away.
7000
7001@cindex PE import table prefixing
7002@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
7003The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
7004the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
7005element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
7006import tables. By default this option is turned off.
7007
7008@cindex BE8
7009@kindex --be8
7010The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
7011executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
7012objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
7013option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
7014little-endian code.
7015
7016@cindex TARGET1
7017@kindex --target1-rel
7018@kindex --target1-abs
7019The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
7020@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
7021or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
7022and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
7023
7024@cindex TARGET2
7025@kindex --target2=@var{type}
7026The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
7027@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
7028meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
7029@table @samp
7030@item rel
7031@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
7032@item abs
7033@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
7034@item got-rel
7035@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
7036@end table
7037
7038@cindex FIX_V4BX
7039@kindex --fix-v4bx
7040The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
7041specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
7042interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
7043also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
7044
7045In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
7046linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
7047@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
7048
7049In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
7050relocations are ignored.
7051
7052@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
7053@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
7054Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
7055relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
7056
7057@smallexample
7058TST rM, #1
7059MOVEQ PC, rM
7060BX Rn
7061@end smallexample
7062
7063This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
7064and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
7065condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
7066
7067@cindex USE_BLX
7068@kindex --use-blx
7069The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
7070BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
7071situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
7072code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
7073each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
7074
7075This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
7076specify it if you are using that target.
7077
7078@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
7079@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
7080The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
7081bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
7082instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
7083to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
7084the support code can read the intended values.
7085
7086The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
7087intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
7088and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
7089intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
7090full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
7091you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
7092
7093If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
7094enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
7095@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
7096mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
7097vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
7098@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
7099
7100If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7101potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7102such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
7103first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
7104instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
7105the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
7106are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
7107
7108@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
7109@kindex --fix-arm1176
7110@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
7111The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
7112in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
7113are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
7114unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
7115
7116Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
7117Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
7118http://infocenter.arm.com/.
7119
7120@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
7121@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
7122
7123The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
7124workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
7125the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
7126off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
7127the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
7128core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
7129integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
7130VPOP. Stores are not affected.
7131
7132The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
7133necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
7134
7135The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
7136@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
7137STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
7138linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
7139@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
7140
7141If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7142potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7143such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
7144replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
7145branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
7146then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
7147
7148The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
7149the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
7150
7151The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
7152they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
7153there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7154occurs.
7155
7156The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
7157PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
7158large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
7159cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7160occurs.
7161
7162@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
7163@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
7164The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7165warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7166enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7167linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
7168using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
7169not be diagnosed.
7170
7171@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
7172@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
7173The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7174warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7175@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7176linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
7177using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
7178
7179@cindex PIC_VENEER
7180@kindex --pic-veneer
7181The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
7182ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
7183is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
7184@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
7185
7186@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
7187@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7188The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
7189code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7190perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7191placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
7192controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
7193The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
7194duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
7195group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7196code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7197where they should be placed.
7198
7199The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7200@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
7201placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
7202branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7203placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7204value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7205exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7206A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7207linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7208from the input sections.
7209
7210The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7211@samp{N = +1}.
7212
7213Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7214only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7215otherwise.
7216
7217@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7218@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7219@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7220The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7221
7222The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7223
7224@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7225@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7226@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7227The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7228
7229Please contact ARM for further details.
7230
7231@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7232@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7233@cindex Merging exidx entries
7234The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7235
7236@kindex --long-plt
7237@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7238The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7239which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7240entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7241
7242@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7243@cindex AArch64 rela addend
7244The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7245link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7246
7247@cindex Placement of SG veneers
7248All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7249Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
7250@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7251veneers in memory.
7252
7253@kindex --cmse-implib
7254@cindex Secure gateway import library
7255The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7256specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7257secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7258executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7259
7260@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7261@cindex Input import library
7262The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7263must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7264given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7265in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7266@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7267library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7268library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7269for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7270specified.
7271
7272@ifclear GENERIC
7273@lowersections
7274@end ifclear
7275@end ifset
7276
7277@ifset HPPA
7278@ifclear GENERIC
7279@raisesections
7280@end ifclear
7281
7282@node HPPA ELF32
7283@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7284@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7285@kindex --multi-subspace
7286When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7287import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7288The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7289stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7290multiple sub-spaces.
7291
7292@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7293@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7294Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7295stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7296@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7297sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7298a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7299the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7300conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7301prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7302A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7303branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7304@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7305@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7306detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7307positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7308
7309Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7310single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7311create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7312large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7313
7314@ifclear GENERIC
7315@lowersections
7316@end ifclear
7317@end ifset
7318
7319@ifset M68K
7320@ifclear GENERIC
7321@raisesections
7322@end ifclear
7323
7324@node M68K
7325@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7326
7327@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7328@kindex --got=@var{type}
7329The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7330The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7331@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7332the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7333@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7334entries only at non-negative offsets.
7335@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7336entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7337support such GOTs.
7338@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7339output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7340file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7341files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7342
7343@ifclear GENERIC
7344@lowersections
7345@end ifclear
7346@end ifset
7347
7348@ifset MIPS
7349@ifclear GENERIC
7350@raisesections
7351@end ifclear
7352
7353@node MIPS
7354@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7355
7356@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7357@kindex --insn32
7358@kindex --no-insn32
7359The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7360microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7361in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7362used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7363or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7364including 16-bit ones where possible.
7365
7366@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7367@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7368@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7369The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7370control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7371@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7372relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7373calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7374relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7375instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7376or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7377the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7378
7379@ifclear GENERIC
7380@lowersections
7381@end ifclear
7382@end ifset
7383
7384@ifset MMIX
7385@ifclear GENERIC
7386@raisesections
7387@end ifclear
7388
7389@node MMIX
7390@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7391For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7392@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7393understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7394can translate between the two formats.
7395
7396There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7397Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7398registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7399equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7400@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7401global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7402this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7403symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7404
7405Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7406@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7407The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7408of a section.
7409
7410Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7411are left out from an mmo file.
7412
7413@ifclear GENERIC
7414@lowersections
7415@end ifclear
7416@end ifset
7417
7418@ifset MSP430
7419@ifclear GENERIC
7420@raisesections
7421@end ifclear
7422
7423@node MSP430
7424@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7425For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7426will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7427just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7428
7429@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7430The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7431
7432@table @code
7433@item @samp{.vectors}
7434Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7435
7436@item @samp{.bootloader}
7437Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7438in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7439
7440@item @samp{.infomem}
7441Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7442this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7443
7444@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
7445This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7446in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7447
7448@item @samp{.noinit}
7449Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7450
7451The last two sections are used by gcc.
7452@end table
7453
7454@table @option
7455@cindex MSP430 Options
7456@kindex --code-region
7457@item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7458This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7459argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7460using this option.
7461
7462@kindex --data-region
7463@item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7464This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7465[either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7466for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7467
7468@kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7469@item --disable-sec-transformation
7470Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7471and @code{--data-region} options.
7472This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7473wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7474not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7475@end table
7476
7477@ifclear GENERIC
7478@lowersections
7479@end ifclear
7480@end ifset
7481
7482@ifset NDS32
7483@ifclear GENERIC
7484@raisesections
7485@end ifclear
7486
7487@node NDS32
7488@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7489@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7490For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7491relaxes objects according to these options.
7492
7493@table @code
7494@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7495Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7496
7497@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7498Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7499
7500@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7501Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7502
7503@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7504Export the EX9 table after linking.
7505
7506@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7507Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7508
7509@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7510Update the existing EX9 table.
7511
7512@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7513Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7514
7515@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7516Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7517
7518@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7519Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7520
7521@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7522Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7523@end table
7524
7525@ifclear GENERIC
7526@lowersections
7527@end ifclear
7528@end ifset
7529
7530@ifset NIOSII
7531@ifclear GENERIC
7532@raisesections
7533@end ifclear
7534
7535@node Nios II
7536@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7537@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7538@kindex --relax on Nios II
7539
7540Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7541transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7542which may result in @command{ld} giving
7543@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7544The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7545trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7546outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7547trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7548be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7549larger than 256MB.
7550
7551The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7552is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7553@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7554locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7555source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7556register as a temporary.
7557
7558Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7559relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7560option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7561
7562@ifclear GENERIC
7563@lowersections
7564@end ifclear
7565@end ifset
7566
7567@ifset POWERPC
7568@ifclear GENERIC
7569@raisesections
7570@end ifclear
7571
7572@node PowerPC ELF32
7573@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7574@cindex PowerPC long branches
7575@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7576Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7577displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7578@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7579@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7580the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7581section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7582section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7583@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7584both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7585considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7586
7587@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7588@table @option
7589@cindex PowerPC PLT
7590@kindex --bss-plt
7591@item --bss-plt
7592Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7593generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7594the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7595writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7596@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7597PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7598compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7599BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7600
7601@kindex --secure-plt
7602@item --secure-plt
7603@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7604@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7605when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7606layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7607style BSS PLT.
7608
7609@cindex PowerPC GOT
7610@kindex --sdata-got
7611@item --sdata-got
7612The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7613sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7614@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7615section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7616@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7617@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7618@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7619@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7620PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7621pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7622GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7623really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7624
7625@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7626@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7627@item --emit-stub-syms
7628This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7629symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7630
7631@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7632@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7633@item --no-tls-optimize
7634PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7635sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7636disable the optimization.
7637@end table
7638
7639@ifclear GENERIC
7640@lowersections
7641@end ifclear
7642@end ifset
7643
7644@ifset POWERPC64
7645@ifclear GENERIC
7646@raisesections
7647@end ifclear
7648
7649@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7650@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7651
7652@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7653@table @option
7654@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7655@kindex --stub-group-size
7656@item --stub-group-size
7657Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7658by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7659@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7660sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7661a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7662the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7663conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7664prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7665A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7666branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7667@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7668@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7669detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7670positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7671
7672Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7673single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7674create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7675large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7676
7677@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7678@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7679@item --emit-stub-syms
7680This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7681symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7682
7683@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7684@kindex --dotsyms
7685@kindex --no-dotsyms
7686@item --dotsyms
7687@itemx --no-dotsyms
7688These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7689in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7690function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7691code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7692properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7693to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7694@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7695dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7696feature.
7697
7698@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7699@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7700@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7701@item --save-restore-funcs
7702@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7703These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7704provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7705@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7706function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7707link.
7708
7709@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7710@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7711@item --no-tls-optimize
7712PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7713sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7714disable the optimization.
7715
7716@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7717@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7718@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7719@kindex --tls-get-addr-regsave
7720@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-regsave
7721@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7722@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7723These options control how PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7724stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7725an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7726@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7727stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables
7728generation of the stub when glibc advertises the availability of
7729__tls_get_addr_opt.
7730Using @option{--tls-get-addr-optimize} with an older glibc won't do
7731much besides slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking
7732an application against an older glibc with the expectation that it
7733will normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7734@option{--tls-get-addr-regsave} forces generation of a stub that saves
7735and restores volatile registers around the call into glibc. Normally,
7736this is done when the linker detects a call to __tls_get_addr_desc.
7737Such calls then go via the register saving stub to __tls_get_addr_opt.
7738@option{--no-tls-get-addr-regsave} disables generation of the
7739register saves.
7740
7741@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7742@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7743@item --no-opd-optimize
7744PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7745corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7746the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7747Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7748
7749@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7750@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7751@item --non-overlapping-opd
7752Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7753@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7754the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7755entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7756
7757@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7758@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7759@item --no-toc-optimize
7760PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7761entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7762reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7763marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7764marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7765relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7766unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7767reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7768discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7769reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7770code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7771optimization.
7772
7773@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7774@kindex --no-multi-toc
7775@item --no-multi-toc
7776If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7777@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7778where TOC
7779entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7780total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7781grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7782TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7783calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7784help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
778564K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7786Use this option to turn off this feature.
7787
7788@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7789@kindex --no-toc-sort
7790@item --no-toc-sort
7791By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7792happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7793placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7794with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7795referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7796@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7797results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7798off this feature.
7799
7800@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7801@kindex --plt-align
7802@kindex --no-plt-align
7803@item --plt-align
7804@itemx --no-plt-align
7805Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7806aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7807boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7808specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7809specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7810if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7811PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
7812
7813@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7814@kindex --plt-static-chain
7815@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7816@item --plt-static-chain
7817@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7818Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7819chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7820chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7821
7822@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7823@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7824@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7825@item --plt-thread-safe
7826@itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
7827With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7828lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7829another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7830order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7831memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7832barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7833looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7834seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7835default behaviour.
7836
7837@cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7838@kindex --plt-localentry
7839@kindex --no-plt-localentry
7840@item --plt-localentry
7841@itemx --no-localentry
7842ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7843ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7844(the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7845Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7846or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7847functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7848in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
7849interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7850including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7851to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7852complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7853care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
7854@end table
7855
7856@ifclear GENERIC
7857@lowersections
7858@end ifclear
7859@end ifset
7860
7861@ifset S/390
7862@ifclear GENERIC
7863@raisesections
7864@end ifclear
7865
7866@node S/390 ELF
7867@section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7868
7869@cindex S/390 ELF options
7870@table @option
7871
7872@cindex S/390
7873@kindex --s390-pgste
7874@item --s390-pgste
7875This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7876segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7877binaries marked that way.
7878@end table
7879
7880@ifclear GENERIC
7881@lowersections
7882@end ifclear
7883@end ifset
7884
7885@ifset SPU
7886@ifclear GENERIC
7887@raisesections
7888@end ifclear
7889
7890@node SPU ELF
7891@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7892
7893@cindex SPU ELF options
7894@table @option
7895
7896@cindex SPU plugins
7897@kindex --plugin
7898@item --plugin
7899This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7900
7901@cindex SPU overlays
7902@kindex --no-overlays
7903@item --no-overlays
7904Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7905regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7906@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7907turns off all this special overlay handling.
7908
7909@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7910@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7911@item --emit-stub-syms
7912This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7913symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7914
7915@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7916@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7917@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7918This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7919function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7920on calls to non-overlay regions.
7921
7922@cindex SPU local store size
7923@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7924@item --local-store=lo:hi
7925@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7926the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7927range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7928
7929@cindex SPU
7930@kindex --stack-analysis
7931@item --stack-analysis
7932SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7933unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7934under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7935@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7936@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7937determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7938for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7939for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7940for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7941find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7942and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7943under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7944dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7945is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7946and calls will be given.
7947
7948@cindex SPU
7949@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7950@item --emit-stack-syms
7951This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7952in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7953These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7954functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7955functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7956such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7957The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7958@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7959@end table
7960
7961@ifclear GENERIC
7962@lowersections
7963@end ifclear
7964@end ifset
7965
7966@ifset TICOFF
7967@ifclear GENERIC
7968@raisesections
7969@end ifclear
7970
7971@node TI COFF
7972@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7973@cindex TI COFF versions
7974@kindex --format=@var{version}
7975The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7976TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7977also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7978format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7979header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7980
7981@ifclear GENERIC
7982@lowersections
7983@end ifclear
7984@end ifset
7985
7986@ifset WIN32
7987@ifclear GENERIC
7988@raisesections
7989@end ifclear
7990
7991@node WIN32
7992@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7993
7994This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7995See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
7996command-line options mentioned here.
7997
7998@table @emph
7999@cindex import libraries
8000@item import libraries
8001The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
8002libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
8003regular static archives and are handled as any other static
8004archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
8005support for creating such libraries provided with the
8006@samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
8007
8008@item exporting DLL symbols
8009@cindex exporting DLL symbols
8010The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
8011
8012@table @emph
8013@item using auto-export functionality
8014@cindex using auto-export functionality
8015By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
8016which is controlled by the following command-line options:
8017
8018@itemize
8019@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
8020@item --exclude-symbols
8021@item --exclude-libs
8022@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
8023@item --version-script
8024@end itemize
8025
8026When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
8027(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
8028symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
8029often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
8030private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
8031options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
8032exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
8033final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
8034
8035If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
8036command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
8037if either of the following are true:
8038
8039@itemize
8040@item A DEF file is used.
8041@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
8042@end itemize
8043
8044@item using a DEF file
8045@cindex using a DEF file
8046Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
8047an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
8048exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
8049name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
8050command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
8051
8052@example
8053gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
8054@end example
8055
8056Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
8057@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8058
8059Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
8060
8061@example
8062LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
8063
8064EXPORTS
8065foo
8066bar
8067_bar = bar
8068another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
8069var1 DATA
8070doo = foo == foo2
8071eoo DATA == var1
8072@end example
8073
8074This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
8075symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
8076alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
8077by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
8078@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
8079@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
8080export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
8081in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
8082symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
8083
8084The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
8085name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
8086the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
8087
8088When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
8089library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
8090@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
8091executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
8092
8093With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
8094specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
8095non-default base address for the image.
8096
8097If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
8098or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
8099filename specified on the command line.
8100
8101The complete specification of an export symbol is:
8102
8103@example
8104EXPORTS
8105 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
8106 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
8107 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
8108@end example
8109
8110Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
8111@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
8112@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
8113@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
8114Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
8115@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
8116string in import/export table for the symbol.
8117
8118The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
8119
8120@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
8121will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
8122by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
8123linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
8124library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
8125
8126@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
8127The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
8128the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
8129@code{*_imp__foo}).
8130
8131@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
8132well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
8133read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
8134variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
8135the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
8136extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
8137application will behave unexpectedly.
8138
8139@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
8140it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
8141symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
8142API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
8143the DLL without an import library.
8144
8145See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
8146other DEF file statements
8147
8148@cindex creating a DEF file
8149While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
8150with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
8151
8152@item Using decorations
8153@cindex Using decorations
8154Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
8155itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
8156declared as:
8157
8158@example
8159__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
8160__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
8161@end example
8162
8163All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
8164any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
8165this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
8166the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8167
8168Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
8169decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
8170instead:
8171
8172@example
8173__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
8174__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
8175@end example
8176
8177This complicates the structure of library header files, because
8178when included by the library itself the header must declare the
8179variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
8180code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
8181of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
8182omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
8183@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
8184information.
8185@end table
8186
8187@cindex automatic data imports
8188@item automatic data imports
8189The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
8190by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
8191compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
8192issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
8193code to these platforms, especially for large
8194c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
8195initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
8196decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
8197platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
8198command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8199The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8200suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8201trigger the feature's use.
8202
8203auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
8204additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8205
8206"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
8207documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8208
8209The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8210occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8211One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
8212below.
8213
8214@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
8215For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8216object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8217offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8218field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8219in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
8220without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
8221The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
8222references.
8223
8224The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8225be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8226themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8227runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8228compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8229support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
8230run without error on an older system.
8231
8232@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8233enabled as needed.
8234
8235@cindex direct linking to a dll
8236@item direct linking to a dll
8237The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8238including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
8239libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
8240traditional import library method, especially when linking large
8241libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8242function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8243though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
8244storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
8245tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
8246large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8247
8248Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
8249@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
8250of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
8251perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8252select the dll instead of an import library.
8253
8254
8255For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8256to find, in the first directory of its search path,
8257
8258@example
8259libxxx.dll.a
8260xxx.dll.a
8261libxxx.a
8262xxx.lib
8263libxxx.lib
8264cygxxx.dll (*)
8265libxxx.dll
8266xxx.dll
8267@end example
8268
8269before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8270
8271(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8272where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8273@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8274file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
8275@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8276
8277Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8278@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
8279was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8280various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8281could coexist on the same machine.
8282
8283The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8284applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
8285libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
8286
8287@example
8288bin/
8289 cygxxx.dll
8290lib/
8291 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
8292 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
8293@end example
8294
8295Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8296done two ways:
8297
82981. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8299@example
8300gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
8301@end example
8302
8303However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8304(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8305@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8306not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8307
83082. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8309directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8310should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8311making the app/dll.
8312
8313@example
8314ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
8315@end example
8316
8317Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8318
8319@example
8320gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
8321@end example
8322
8323This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8324perfectly legal
8325
8326@example
8327bin/
8328 cygxxx-5.dll
8329lib/
8330 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
8331@end example
8332
8333Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
8334even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8335@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8336
8337Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
8338wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
8339
83401. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8341work with auto-imported data.
8342
83432. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8344import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8345symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8346for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8347possible to do this without an import lib.
8348
83493. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8350critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8351in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8352stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8353
8354So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
8355true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8356a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8357binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
8358massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8359requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8360will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
8361
8362@item symbol aliasing
8363@table @emph
8364@item adding additional names
8365Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
8366A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8367exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8368when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
8369import library. Consider the following DEF file:
8370
8371@example
8372LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8373
8374EXPORTS
8375foo
8376_foo = foo
8377@end example
8378
8379The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8380
8381Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8382source code using the "weak" attribute:
8383
8384@example
8385void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
8386void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
8387@end example
8388
8389See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8390symbols.
8391
8392@item renaming symbols
8393Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
8394kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
8395@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8396DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
8397created). In the following example:
8398
8399@example
8400LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8401
8402EXPORTS
8403_foo = foo
8404@end example
8405
8406The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8407@samp{_foo}.
8408@end table
8409
8410Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
8411unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
8412If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
8413@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8414that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8415@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8416renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8417to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8418the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8419In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
8420which is probably not what you wanted.
8421
8422@cindex weak externals
8423@item weak externals
8424The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8425weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8426defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8427are three variants of weak externals:
8428@itemize
8429@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8430called lazy externals.
8431@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8432This form is not presently implemented.
8433@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8434implemented.
8435@end itemize
8436As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8437are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8438uses a default value.
8439
8440@cindex aligned common symbols
8441@item aligned common symbols
8442As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8443desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8444the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8445carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8446by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8447tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8448but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8449warnings about unknown linker directives.
8450
8451@end table
8452
8453@ifclear GENERIC
8454@lowersections
8455@end ifclear
8456@end ifset
8457
8458@ifset XTENSA
8459@ifclear GENERIC
8460@raisesections
8461@end ifclear
8462
8463@node Xtensa
8464@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8465
8466@cindex Xtensa processors
8467The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8468@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8469specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8470keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8471example, with the command:
8472
8473@smallexample
8474SECTIONS
8475@{
8476 .text : @{
8477 *(.literal .text)
8478 @}
8479@}
8480@end smallexample
8481
8482@noindent
8483@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8484and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8485literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8486interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8487group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8488files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8489and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
8490
8491@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
8492@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
8493Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8494provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8495is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8496literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8497will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8498location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8499the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8500unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8501@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8502range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8503
8504For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8505to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8506instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8507instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8508instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8509@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8510hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8511By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8512switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8513density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8514instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8515performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8516linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8517a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8518
8519The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8520control the linker:
8521
8522@cindex Xtensa options
8523@table @option
8524@item --size-opt
8525When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8526more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8527no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8528alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8529preserve the correctness of the code.
8530@end table
8531
8532@ifclear GENERIC
8533@lowersections
8534@end ifclear
8535@end ifset
8536
8537@ifclear SingleFormat
8538@node BFD
8539@chapter BFD
8540
8541@cindex back end
8542@cindex object file management
8543@cindex object formats available
8544@kindex objdump -i
8545The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8546These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8547object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8548format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8549it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8550associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8551object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8552(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8553list all the formats available for your configuration.
8554
8555@cindex BFD requirements
8556@cindex requirements for BFD
8557As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8558several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8559BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8560formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8561been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8562BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8563may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8564
8565One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8566mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8567useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8568conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8569
8570@menu
8571* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8572@end menu
8573
8574@node BFD outline
8575@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8576@cindex opening object files
8577@include bfdsumm.texi
8578@end ifclear
8579
8580@node Reporting Bugs
8581@chapter Reporting Bugs
8582@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8583@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8584
8585Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8586
8587Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8588it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8589to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8590work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8591@command{ld}.
8592
8593In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8594information that enables us to fix the bug.
8595
8596@menu
8597* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8598* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8599@end menu
8600
8601@node Bug Criteria
8602@section Have You Found a Bug?
8603@cindex bug criteria
8604
8605If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8606
8607@itemize @bullet
8608@cindex fatal signal
8609@cindex linker crash
8610@cindex crash of linker
8611@item
8612If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8613@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8614
8615@cindex error on valid input
8616@item
8617If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8618
8619@cindex invalid input
8620@item
8621If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8622may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8623object files are correct.
8624
8625@item
8626If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8627improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8628@end itemize
8629
8630@node Bug Reporting
8631@section How to Report Bugs
8632@cindex bug reports
8633@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8634
8635A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8636products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8637recommend you contact that organization first.
8638
8639You can find contact information for many support companies and
8640individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8641distribution.
8642
8643@ifset BUGURL
8644Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8645@value{BUGURL}.
8646@end ifset
8647
8648The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8649@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8650fact or leave it out, state it!
8651
8652Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8653problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8654assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8655matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8656the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8657location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8658were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8659into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8660specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8661and the most helpful.
8662
8663Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8664the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8665on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8666
8667Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8668bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8669respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8670You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8671
8672To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8673
8674@itemize @bullet
8675@item
8676The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8677the @samp{--version} argument.
8678
8679Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8680the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8681
8682@item
8683Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8684patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8685
8686@item
8687The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8688version number.
8689
8690@item
8691What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8692``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8693
8694@item
8695The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8696observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8697list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8698sufficient.
8699
8700If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8701and then we might not encounter the bug.
8702
8703@item
8704A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8705bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8706provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8707bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8708state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8709requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8710we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8711attachments are best.
8712
8713If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8714@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8715object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8716@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8717how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8718
8719@item
8720A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8721incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8722
8723Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8724will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8725not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8726a chance to make a mistake.
8727
8728Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8729say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8730copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8731C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8732and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8733fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8734you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8735any conclusion from our observations.
8736
8737@item
8738If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8739diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8740@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8741If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8742context, not by line number.
8743
8744The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8745sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8746@end itemize
8747
8748Here are some things that are not necessary:
8749
8750@itemize @bullet
8751@item
8752A description of the envelope of the bug.
8753
8754Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8755which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8756changes will not affect it.
8757
8758This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8759will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8760with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8761We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8762
8763Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8764of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8765output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8766less time, and so on.
8767
8768However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8769report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8770
8771@item
8772A patch for the bug.
8773
8774A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8775the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8776a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8777to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8778
8779Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8780construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8781through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8782able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8783fixed.
8784
8785And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8786patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8787help us to understand.
8788
8789@item
8790A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8791
8792Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8793things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8794@end itemize
8795
8796@node MRI
8797@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8798@cindex MRI compatibility
8799To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8800linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8801alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8802described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8803simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8804@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8805linker commands; these commands are described here.
8806
8807In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8808file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8809features to make use of them.
8810
8811You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8812@samp{-c} command-line option.
8813
8814Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8815command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8816blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8817MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8818issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8819
8820Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8821
8822You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8823lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8824The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8825
8826@table @code
8827@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8828@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8829@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8830Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8831the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8832@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8833your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8834script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8835commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8836input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8837@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8838
8839@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8840@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8841Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8842in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8843
8844@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8845
8846@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8847@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8848Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8849@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8850
8851@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8852@item BASE @var{expression}
8853Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8854absolute addresses) in the output file.
8855
8856@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8857@item CHIP @var{expression}
8858@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8859This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8860
8861@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8862@item END
8863This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8864
8865@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8866@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8867Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8868language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8869
8870@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8871@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8872Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8873@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8874
8875The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8876same line, with no change in its effect.
8877
8878@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8879@item LOAD @var{filename}
8880@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8881Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8882same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8883command line.
8884
8885@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8886@item NAME @var{output-name}
8887@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8888MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8889option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8890
8891@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8892@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8893@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8894Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8895order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8896script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8897sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8898file, in the order specified.
8899
8900@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8901@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8902@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8903@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8904Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8905@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8906
8907@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8908@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8909@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8910@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8911You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8912specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8913If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8914@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8915@end table
8916
8917@node GNU Free Documentation License
8918@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8919@include fdl.texi
8920
8921@node LD Index
8922@unnumbered LD Index
8923
8924@printindex cp
8925
8926@tex
8927% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8928% meantime:
8929\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8930\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8931\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8932\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8933\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8934\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8935\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8936\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8937\page\colophon
8938% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8939@end tex
8940
8941@bye
This page took 0.054 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.